2008
OWNER’S MANUAL
Keep With Vehicle At All Times.
Contains Important Information
On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.
Part No. 99011-85Z14-03E
July, 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Prepared by
July, 2007
Part No. 99011-85Z14-03E
Printed in U.S.A.
TP222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This owner’s manual applies to the RENO series:
85Z005
NOTE: The illustrated model is one of the RENO series.
© COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2007
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value
that will give you years of driving pleasure.
This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn
about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.
Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.
Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.
In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you
read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.
When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-
tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STATION GUIDE
1. Fuel (see section 5)
2. Engine hood (see section 5)
3. Tire changing tools (see section 5)
4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>
(see section 5)
5. Engine coolant (see section 5)
6. Windshield washer fluid
(see section 5)
8 (RHD)
1
7. Battery (see section 5)
8. Tire pressure (see tire information
label on driver’s door lock pillar)
9. Spare tire (see section 5)
10. Engine air cleaner / filter
(see section 5)
2
10
(RHD)
3
9
2
4
7
2 (LHD)
5
8 (LHD)
6
85Z021
LHD: Left Hand Drive
RHD: Right Hand Drive
NOTE: The illustration is RENO.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-
ents, and certain product compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCATION OF WARNING
MESSAGES
4
13
Read and follow all of the warnings (labels
etc.) on your vehicle. Make sure you
understand all of them. Keep them on the
vehicle. Do not remove the messages for
any reason. If a label comes off or the
messages become difficult to read, have it
corrected by your SUZUKI dealer.
12
11
1. Air Bag Warning Label
2. Passenger Air Bag Warning Label
3. Rear Center Safety Belt Warning
Label
4. Jack Warning Label
1
3
5. Brake Reservoir Cap Warning Mes-
sage
6. Cooling Fan Warning Label
7. Surge Tank Cap Warning Message
8. Air Conditioner Warning Label
9. Battery Label
14
5
7
10. Emission Label
11. Tire and Loading Information Label
12. Certification Label
13. Spare Tire Label
14. Side Air Bag Warning Label
9
2
10
8
6
85Z020
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH
YOUR SUZUKI:
If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada
please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-
tomer Relations Department by telephone
at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in
writing at:
FOREWORD
Please review the New Vehicle Warranty
Information booklet supplied with your
SUZUKI. Should you have a question or
problem regarding the warranty or service
of your vehicle, please take the following
action:
All information in this manual is based
on the latest product information avail-
able at the time of publication. Due to
improvements or other changes, there
may be discrepancies between informa-
tion in this manual and your vehicle.
Suzuki Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
100 East Beaver Creek Road
Richmond Hill, On
L4B 1J6
Consult the Service Manager and the
Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer-
ship. Explain your problem and ask for
their assistance in resolving your problem.
The Owner of the dealership is in the very
best position to assist you as he or she is
vitally concerned with your continued satis-
faction.
SUZUKI
MOTOR
CORPORATION
reserves the right to make production
changes at any time, without notice and
without incurring any obligation to
make the same or similar changes to
vehicles previously built or sold.
In the event you require assistance related
to your SUZUKI, while temporarily travel-
ling in either the United States or Canada,
you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus-
tomer Relations Department directly of the
country in which you are temporarily oper-
ating your vehicle.
If you are still in need of additional informa-
tion, or if you are dissatisfied, request that
your SUZUKI dealer arrange a meeting
with your District Service Manager.
SUZUKI
MOTOR
CORPORATION
Please be certain to provide us with the fol-
lowing information: the model, Vehicle
Identification Number, mileage, accesso-
ries involved, event dates, your concern,
and any other comments which you may
have. When we receive your correspon-
dence, we will be pleased to contact the
Owner of your dealership and assist in
resolving your concern.
believes in conservation and protection of
Earth’s natural resources.
To that end, we encourage every vehicle
owner to recycle, trade in, or properly dis-
pose of, as appropriate, used motor oil,
coolant, and other fluids, batteries and
tires.
If, after doing so, you still require further
assistance, and you purchased your
SUZUKI in the continental United States,
please contact the American Suzuki Cus-
tomer Relations Department by telephone
at 1-800-934-0934 or in writing at:
For owners outside the continental United
States, please refer to the distributor’s
address listed in your Warranty Information
booklet.
American Suzuki Motor Corporation
Automotive Customer Relations
3251 East Imperial Highway
Brea, CA 92821-6795
0-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT
MODIFICATION WARNING
WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE
Please read this manual and follow its
instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-
cial information, the symbol
words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE
have special meanings. Pay special atten-
tion to the messages highlighted by these
signal words:
WARNING
Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-
tion could adversely affect safety,
handling, performance or durability
and may violate governmental regula-
tions. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
and the
WARNING
Indicates
a
potential hazard that
could result in death or injury.
75F135
CAUTION
The circle with a slash in this manual
means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-
pen”.
Improper installation of mobile com-
munication equipment such as cellu-
lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)
radios may cause electronic interfer-
ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-
tem, resulting in vehicle performance
problems. Consult your SUZUKI
dealer or qualified service technician
for advice on installing such mobile
communication equipment.
CAUTION
Indicates
a
potential hazard that
could result in vehicle damage.
NOTE:
Indicates special information to make
maintenance easier or instructions clearer.
0-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbols
Your vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle, are shown along with the text
describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component, gauge or indicator, reference the following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section
1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gauges and Indicators
in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Sec-
tion 5
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR
LAMP
TIRE
PRESSURE
WARNING
LIGHT
DOOR
AJAR
LIGHT
WARNING
POSSIBLE
INJURY
INSTRUMENT
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
AIR BAG
PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
EMERGENCY
CRUISE
CONTROL
RELEASE
LIGHT
TURN
SIGNALS
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
WASHER
FLUID
TRUNK
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
TRUNK
AJAR
LIGHT
SULFURIC
BATTERY
ACID CAN
CAUSE
HOLD MODE
FUEL
ACTIVE
LIGHT
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
POSITION
BRAKE
POWER
STEERING
FLUID
BLINDNESS
OR SEVERE
BURNS
SPEED
SENSITIVE
POWER
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
OWNER'S
MANUAL
COOLANT
STEERING
WARNING
LIGHT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
TRACTION
CONTROL
SYSTEM
HOOD
FUEL
FILLER
HIGHBEAM
ON
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
RELEASE
ACTIVE LIGHT
LIGHT
FLUSH EYES
IMMEDIATELY
WITH WATER
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
POWER
WINDOW
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
FOG
LAMPS
L3U0002CS
0-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
0-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1
Front Seats .......................................................................... 1-1
Rear Seats ............................................................................ 1-4
Safety Belts .......................................................................... 1-5
Child Restraints ................................................................... 1-15
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 1-26
Restraint System Check ..................................................... 1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If your vehicle does not have a sliding stor-
age tray under the front seat, the manual
seat bar looks like this.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
(With Sliding Storage Tray)
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex-
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Make sure that the driver’s seat and
seatback are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
N4U1001A
Pull up and hold the lever located under
the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the
seat to where you want it and release the
lever. Then try to move the seat forward or
rearward to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
WARNING
N4U1002A
To avoid excessive seat belt slack,
which reduces the effectiveness of
the seat belts as a safety device,
make sure that the seats are adjusted
before the seat belts are fastened.
Pull up and hold the bar located under the
front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat
to where you want it and release the bar.
Then try to move the seat with your body,
to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Manual Seats
(Without Sliding Storage Tray)
If your vehicle has a sliding storage tray
under the front seat, the manual seat lever
looks like this.
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the driver’s
seat or seatback while driving. The
seat or seatback could move unex-
pectedly, causing loss of control.
Make sure that the driver’s seat and
seatback are properly adjusted
before you start driving.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Reclining Seatbacks
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
Your vehicle may have manually operated
lumbar support for the driver’s seat.
N4U1003A
N4U1005A
To adjust the height of the driver’s seat
cushion, turn the knobs located on the out-
board side of the seat cushion.
To adjust the seatback angle, lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat
and move the seatback to the desired posi-
tion.
N4U1004A
To adjust the front seat lumbar support,
use the lever located on the outboard side
of the seatback.
Turn the front knob to adjust the height of
the front portion of the seat cushion. Turn
the rear knob to adjust the height of the
rear portion of the seat cushion.
Release the lever and push rearward on
the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Push the lever down to adjust the support
for the lower part of the seatback. Pull the
lever up to return the support to its original
position.
Pull up on the lever without pushing on the
seatback and the seatback will move to an
upright position.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Pull up the head restraint in order to adjust
the position upward.
Head Restraints
L3U1009A
your vehicle is moving.
75F123
N4U1010A
Head restraints are designed to help
reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of
an accident. Adjust the head restraint to
the position which places the center of the
head restraint closest to the top of your
ears. If this is not possible for very tall pas-
sengers, adjust the head restraint as high
as possible.
Push in the release button and press
downward on the head restraint in order to
adjust the position downward.
WARNING
All seatbacks should always be in a
fairly upright position when driving,
or seat belt effectiveness may be
reduced. Seat belts are designed to
offer maximum protection when seat-
backs are in the fully upright posi-
tion.
To remove the head restraint, pull the head
restraint all the way up. Then push in the
release button and lift the head restraint
from the guide sleeve.
Replace the head restraint and reset it in
the original position before driving.
WARNING
• Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed.
The rear seat head restraints may also be
adjusted.
• Removed or improperly adjusted
head restraints can result in seri-
ous head and neck injuries in case
of collision.
Push in the release button and move the
head restraint to the desired position.
• Do not attempt to adjust the head
restraint while driving.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
2) Push back firmly on the top of the seat-
back until it latches securely in the fully
upright position.
Rear Seats
Folding Rear Seat
Your vehicle has rear seatbacks that can
be folded down to increase cargo space.
WARNING
To fold down the seatback, do the follow-
ing:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or
crash. That could cause injury to the
person sitting there. Always press
rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
N4U1006A
WARNING
A
safety belt that is improperly
If your vehicle is equipped with the tiltable
front head restraints, do the following to
adjust it.
routed, not properly attached, or
twisted won’t provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wear-
ing the belt could be severely injured.
After raising the rear seatback,
always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
1) Place it in its upright position by push-
ing it forward fully and releasing it.
2) Push the head restraint forward care-
fully until it is adjusted to the desired
position.
N4U1007A
1) Push the rear head restraints as far
down as possible.
2) Press down on the release button
located on top of the rear seatback.
3) Fold the rear seatback forward and
down.
To return the seatback to the upright posi-
tion, do the following:
1) Lift up the seatback and push it to its
original position. Ensure that the safety
belts are not twisted or caught under
the seatback.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
Safety Belts
Safety Belt: They are for Everyone
This section of the manual tells you how to
use safety belts properly. It also tells you
some things you should not do with safety
belts.
• Do not stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the front seats.
• Do not allow passengers to sit on
the folded seatbacks while the
vehicle is in motion.
S4U1008A
• Unrestrained luggage or passen-
gers on a folded seatback can be
thrown about or ejected from the
vehicle in a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in section 3.
WARNING
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she
can’t wear a safety belt properly. If
you are in a crash and you’re not
wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be severely
injured or killed. In the same crash,
you might not be, if you are buckled
up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian prov-
inces, the law says to wear safety belts.
Here’s why: They work.
Serious injuries or death can result.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If
you do have a crash, you don’t know if it
will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes
can be so serious that even buckled up, a
person wouldn’t survive. But most crashes
are in between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have
been badly hurt or killed.
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be
severely injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure every-
one in your vehicle is in a seat and is
using a safety belt properly.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most
crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as
fast as it goes.
L3U1017A
L3U1019A
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider doesn’t stop.
or the instrument panel...
L3U1015A
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just
a seat on wheels.
L3U1020A
L3U1018A
or the safety belts!
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
With safety belts, you slow down as the
vehicle does. You get more time to stop.
You stop over more distance, and your
L3U1016A
Put someone on it.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
strongest bones take the forces. That’s
why safety belts make such good sense.
Question: If I’m a good driver, and I
never drive far from home, why should I
wear safety belts?
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s
how to wear it properly.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Answer: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you’re in an accident – even one that
isn’t your fault – you and your passengers
can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t
protect you from things beyond your con-
trol, such as bad drivers.
1) Close and lock the door.
2) Adjust the seat so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
Question: Won’t I be trapped in the
vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a
safety belt?
Answer: You could be – whether you’re
wearing a safety belt or not. But you can
unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re
upside down. And your chance of being
conscious during and after an accident, so
greater if you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40
km) of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Question: If my vehicle has air bags,
why should I have to wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to
know about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller children
and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see “Older Children” or “Infants
and Young Children” in this section. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Answer: Air bags are in many vehicles
today and will be in most of them in the
future. But they are supplemental systems
only; so they work with safety belts – not
instead of them. Every air bag system ever
offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to
get the most protection. That’s true not
only in frontal collisions, but especially in
side and other collisions.
L3U1021A
3) Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt
across you. Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull
the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to
unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
4) Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Driver Position
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would be
This section describes the driver’s restraint
system.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoul-
der belt adjuster to the height that is right
for you. Adjust the height so that the shoul-
der portion of the belt is centered on your
shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
L3U1023A
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the
thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the
strong pelvic bones so you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdo-
men. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to
take belt restraining forces.
L3U1022A
5) To make the lap part tight, pull down on
the buckle end of the belt as you pull up
on the shoulder belt.
S4U1009A
To move it down, squeeze the release but-
ton and move the height adjuster to the
desired position. You can move the
adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide. After you move the
adjuster to where you want it, try to move it
down without squeezing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden
stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
Question: What’s wrong with this?
Question: What’s wrong with this?
Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned on the center of the outside
shoulder. The belt should be away
from your face and neck, but not fall-
ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment
of the belt could reduce the effective-
ness of the safety belt in a crash.
L3U1025A
L3U1026A
Answer: The shoulder belt is too loose. It
won’t give nearly as much protection this
way.
Answer: The belt is buckled in the wrong
place.
WARNING
WARNING
You can be severely injured if your
belt is buckled in the wrong place. In
a crash, the belt would slide up over
your abdomen. The belt forces would
be at the waist, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.
You can be severely hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash,
you would move forward too much,
which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your
body.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Question: What’s wrong with this?
Question: What’s wrong with this?
L3U1029A
L3U1027A
L3U1028A
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on
the buckle. The belt should go back out of
the way.
Answer: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over the shoul-
der at all times.
Answer: The belt is twisted across the
body.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt
is out of the way. If you slam the door on it,
you can damage both the belt and your
vehicle.
WARNING
WARNING
You can be severely injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you wouldn’t
have the full width of the belt to
spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can
work properly, or ask your SUZUKI
dealer to fix it.
You can be severely injured if you
wear the shoulder belt under your
arm. In a crash, your body would
move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck
injury. Also, the belt would apply too
much force to the ribs, which aren’t
as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including
pregnant women. Like all occupants, they
are more likely to be severely injured if they
don’t wear safety belts.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front pas-
senger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver
Position” in this section.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoul-
der belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
The right front passenger’s safety belt
works the same way as the driver’s safety
belt.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers
to buckle up! Accident statistics show that
unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt
more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
L3U1030A
shoulder belt, and the lap portion should
be worn as low as possible, below the
rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle
who are wearing safety belts.
L3U1032A
1) Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt
across you. Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull
the belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to
unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
2) Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks. Be sure you are using the cor-
rect buckle and that the latch plate
clicks when inserted into the buckle.
The best way to protect the fetus is to pro-
tect the mother. When a safety belt is worn
properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t
be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as
for anyone, the key to making safety belts
effective is wearing them properly.
L3U1031A
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
L3U1033A
L3U1034A
L3U1023A
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure
it is secure.
Make sure the release button on the
buckle is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
3) To make the lap part tight, pull down on
the buckle end of the belt as you pull up
on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the
thighs. In a crash this applies force to the
strong pelvic bones so you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under
it, the belt would apply force at your abdo-
men. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to
take belt-restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden
stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
pretensioners. For precautions and gen-
eral information including servicing the
pretensioner system, refer to the “Supple-
mental Restraint System (air bags)” sec-
tion in addition to this “Safety Belt
Pretensioner System” section, and follow
all those precautions.
Safety Belt Pretensioner System
EXAMPLE
You can be severely hurt if your
shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash,
you would move forward too much,
which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your
body.
The pretensioner is located in each front
safety belt retractor. The pretensioner
tightens the safety belt so the belt fits the
occupant’s body more snugly in the event
of a frontal crash. The retractors will
remain locked after the pretensioners are
activated. Upon activation, some noise will
occur and some smoke may be released.
These conditions are not harmful and do
not indicate a fire in the vehicle.
52D011
WARNING
The driver and all passengers must be
properly restrained by wearing safety belts
at all times, whether or not a pretensioner
is equipped at their seating position, to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash. Sit fully back in the
seat; sit up straight; do not lean forward or
sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap portion
of the belt is worn low across the pelvis,
not across the waist. Please refer to the
“Front Seats” section and the instructions
and precautions about the safety belts in
this “Safety Belts” section for details on
proper seat and safety belt adjustments.
This section of the owner’s manual
describes your vehicle’s SAFETY
BELT
PRETENSIONER SYSTEM.
Please read and follow ALL these
instructions carefully to minimize
your risk of severe injury or death.
L3U1067A
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on
the buckle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety belt
pretensioner system at the front seating
positions. You can use the pretensioner
safety belts in the same manner as ordi-
nary safety belts.
The safety belt pretensioner system is acti-
vated based on crash severity. The crash
sensors and the electronic controller of the
air bag system also control the safety belt
Please note that the pretensioners will acti-
vate only in severe frontal collisions. They
are not designed to activate in rear
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
impacts, side impacts, rollovers or minor
frontal collisions. The pretensioners can be
activated only once. If the pretensioners
are activated, have the pretensioner sys-
tem serviced by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer as soon as possible.
your SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop or
scrap yard for assistance.
SUZUKI dealer can select the appropriate
safety belt extender.
• A safety belt extender should only be
used for the person, vehicle and seating
location it was provided for.
• When using the extender, ensure that
both ends are latched securely. Do not
use the extender if the open end of the
extender’s buckle is within 152 mm (6
inches) of the center of the occupant’s
body (See diagram). Use of the extender
when the buckle is too close to the cen-
ter of the body could increase the risk of
abdominal injury in the event of an acci-
dent, and could cause the shoulder belt
to be positioned incorrectly.
Safety Belt Extender
If the air bag readiness light on the instru-
ment cluster does not blink or come on
briefly when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position, stays on for more than
10 seconds, or comes on while driving, the
pretensioner system or the air bag system
may not work properly. Have both systems
inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer
as soon as possible.
• Make sure to use the correct buckle cor-
responding to your seating position.
• Safety belt extenders are not intended
for use by pregnant women, and should
only be used upon approval by their
medical advisors.
Service on or around the pretensioner sys-
tem components or wiring must be per-
formed only by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer who is specially trained. Improper
service could result in unintended activa-
tion of pretensioners or could render the
pretensioners inoperative. Either of these
two conditions may result in personal
injury.
65D613
(1) Center of body
(2) Less than 152 mm (6 inches)
(3) Open end of extender buckle
• Remove and stow the extender when it
is not being used.
If a safety belt cannot be fastened securely
because it is not long enough, see your
authorized SUZUKI dealer for a safety belt
extender. Safety belt extenders are avail-
able for each seating position except for
the rear center position. After inspecting
the relationship between the safety belt
length, the occupant’s body size, and the
seat adjustment (the driver’s seat should
always be adjusted as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle,
and other adjustable seats should be
adjusted as far back as possible), your
To prevent damage or unintended activa-
tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-
tery is disconnected and the ignition switch
has been in the “LOCK” position for at least
60 seconds before performing any electri-
cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do not
touch pretensioner system components or
wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow
tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are
yellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI, ask
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear seat.
Child Restraints
Older Children
In a crash, children who are not buckled up
can strike other people who are buckled
up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a
crash.
• Only use an extender for the per-
son, vehicle and seating position it
was provided for.
• A front safety belt extender must
only be used in a front seating
position, and a rear safety belt
extender must only be used in a
rear seating position.
• Safety belt extenders are not
women, and should only be used
upon approval by their medical
advisors.
• The extender has been designed
for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats.
L3U1036A
Older children who have outgrown booster
seats should wear the vehicle’s safety
belts.
L3U1037A
• Do not use a safety belt extender if
the open end of the extender’s
buckle is within 152 mm (6 inches)
of the center of the occupant’s
body (See diagram).
• Remove and stow the extender
when it is not being used.
Question: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
WARNING
Answer: If possible, an older child should
wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the addi-
tional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the top of the
thighs. It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the
same belt. The belt can’t properly
spread the impact forces. In a crash,
the two children can be crushed
together and severely injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a
time.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Question: What if a child is wearing a
lap-shoulder belt, but the child is so
small that the shoulder belt is very
close to the child’s face or neck?
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!
This includes infants and all other children.
Neither the distance traveled nor the age
and size of the traveler changes the need
to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in
every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up
to some age must be restrained while in a
vehicle.
Answer: If the child is sitting in a seat next
to a window, move the child toward the
center of the vehicle. If the child is sitting in
the center rear seat passenger position,
move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is still very close to the child’s face or neck,
you might want to place the child in a seat
that has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
Every time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the protection
provided by appropriate restraints. Young
children should not use the vehicle’s adult
safety belts alone, unless there is no other
choice. Instead, they need to use a child
restraint.
L3U1038A
WARNING
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that
has lap-shoulder belt, but the
a
shoulder part is behind the child. If
the child wears the belt in this way, in
a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then
be applied right on the child’s abdo-
men. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of
the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the child’s thighs.
This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic
bones in a crash.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Question: What are the different types
of add-on child restraints?
Answer: Add-on child restraints, which are
purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are
available in four basic types. Selection of a
particular restraint should take into consid-
eration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the
restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints,
there are many different models available.
When purchasing a child restraint, be sure
it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
L3U1040B
L3U1039A
WARNING
WARNING
People should never hold a baby in
their arms while riding in a vehicle. A
baby doesn’t weigh much – until a
crash occurs. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possi-
ble to hold it. For example, in a crash
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5
kg) baby will suddenly become a 240-
lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s arms.
A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very
close to, any air bag when it inflates
can be severely injured or killed. Air
bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
outstanding protection for adults and
older children, but not for young chil-
dren and infants. Neither the vehi-
cle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protec-
tion that a child restraint system can
provide.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions
that come with the restraint, state the
weight and height limitations for a particu-
lar child restraint. In addition, there are
many kinds of restraints available for chil-
dren with special needs.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING
Newborn infants need complete sup-
port, including support for the head
and neck. This is necessary because
a newborn infant’s neck is weak and
its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles
into the restraint, so the crash forces
can be distributed across the stron-
gest part of an infant’s body, the back
and shoulders. Infants always should
be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
(B)
L3U1042A
(A)
L3U1041A
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides
restraint with the seating surface against
the back of the infant. The harness system
holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made
for use in a motor vehicle, is an infant
restraint system designed to restrain or
position a child on a continuous flat sur-
face. Make sure that the infant’s head rests
toward the center of the vehicle.
WARNING
The body structure of a young child
is quite unlike that of an adult or
older child, for whom the safety belts
are designed. A young child’s hip
bones are still so small that the vehi-
cle’s regular safety belt may not
remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up
around the child’s abdomen. In a
crash, the belt would apply force on a
body area that’s unprotected by any
bony structure. This alone could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
injury, the child also has to be secured
within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt sys-
tem secures the add-on child restraint in
the vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s
harness system holds the child in place
within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has
straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at
the crotch. The five-point harness system
has two shoulder straps, two hip straps
and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has
shoulder straps that are attached to a flat
pad which rests low against the child’s
body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-
like shield that swings up or to the side.
(D)
(C)
(E)
(F)
(G)
L3U1043A
L3U1044A
restraint for the child’s body with the har-
ness and also sometimes with surfaces
such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F–G) is a child restraint
designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s
safety belt system. Some booster seats
have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a
child to see out the window.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in
a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
Question: How do child restraints
work?
Then follow the instructions for the
restraint. You may find these instructions
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or
both. These restraints use the belt system
in your vehicle, but the child also has to be
secured within the restraint to help reduce
the chance of personal injury. When secur-
ing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The
Answer: A child restraint system is any
device designed for use in a motor vehicle
to restrain, seat, or position children. A
built-in child restraint system is a perma-
nent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one,
which is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints
have used the adult belt system in the
vehicle. To help reduce the chance of
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
WARNING
(Continued)
Children could be endangered in a
crash if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When installing a child restraint sys-
tem, be sure to follow the instruc-
tions below. Be sure to secure the
child in the restraint system accord-
ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag and side
air bag under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not
deploy under some unusual circum-
stance, even though it is turned off.
Always secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat, even if the
air bags are off.
If you need to secure a forward-fac-
ing child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front passen-
ger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by either safety
belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-
shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower
anchor bars built into the seats. Whenever
possible, SUZUKI recommends that child
restraint systems be installed on the rear
seat. According to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly restrained in
rear seating positions than in front seating
positions. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat.
Here’s why:
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or
“top tether.” It can help restrain the child
restraint during a collision. For it to work, a
top strap must be properly anchored to the
vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child
restraints are designed for use with or with-
out the top strap being anchored. Others
require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint. If yours
requires that the top strap be anchored,
don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be severely injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s frontal air bag
inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating air bag.
(Continued)
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child
restraint can move around in a collision or
sudden stop and injure people in the vehi-
cle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle – even when no
child is in it.
If the child restraint does not have a top
strap, one can be obtained, in kit form, for
many child restraints. Ask the child
restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
Each top tether bracket is designed
to anchor only one child restraint.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or
even break during a crash. A child or
others could be injured if this hap-
pens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
S4U1010A
N4U1011A
Once you have the top strap anchored,
you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint
itself. Tighten the top strap when and as
the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
tions say.
facing child restraints have a top strap, and
that the strap be anchored. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a
top strap. If your child restraint has a top
strap, it should be anchored.
Top strap anchors are located at both sides
and at the center of the lower rear tail
member in the rear cargo area.
Pull the front part of the plastic cover
downward to access the top strap anchors.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Top strap anchors are already installed in
your vehicle for the three rear seating posi-
tions.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point
specified in “Top Strap Anchor Location” in
this section. Be sure to use an anchor
point located on the same side of the vehi-
cle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Securing a Child Restraint with Top
Strap
Install the child restraint system as follows:
Do not use a child restraint with a top strap
in the right front passenger’s position
because there is no place to anchor the
top strap.
1) Remove the luggage compartment
cover (if equipped).
2) Secure the child restraint on the rear
seat using the procedure described in
“Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position” of this section.
3) Pull the front part of the plastic cover
downward to access the top strap
anchors.
4) Hook the top strap to the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
according to the instructions provided
by the child restraint system manufac-
turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to
the corresponding anchor located
directly behind the child restraint.
WARNING
Each top tether bracket is designed
to anchor only one child restraint.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or
even break during a crash. A child or
others could be injured if this hap-
pens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
N5U1003A
N4U1009A
5) When routing the top strap, be sure to
pass it between the head restraint and
the rear seatback as shown. (Refer to
“Head Restraints” in this section for
details on how to raise or lower the
head restraint.)
The disks are located near the base of the
two rear outside seating positions.
Canada only
6) Make sure that cargo does not interfere
with routing of the top strap.
This symbol indicates the
presence of a lower connector
system on a child restraint
system or booster cushion.
Lower Anchorages and Top Teth-
ers for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has a LATCH system. You’ll
find anchors (A) in the rear outside seat
positions.
86Z004
To assist you in locating the lower anchors,
each seating position with the LATCH sys-
tem has a circular disk on the seatback at
each lower anchor position.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System
(Rear)
1) Find the anchors for the seating posi-
tion you want to use, where the bottom
of the seatback meets the back of the
seat cushion.
L3U1047A
2) Put the child restraint on the seat.
3) Attach the anchor points on the child
restraint to the anchors in the vehicle.
The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
B
A
C
4) If the child restraint is forward-facing,
attach the top strap to the top strap
anchor. See “Top Strap” in this section.
Tighten the top strap according to the
child restraint instructions.
5) Push and pull the child restraint in dif-
ferent directions to be sure it is secure.
L3U1050A
With this type of child restraint, use the
LATCH system instead of the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the child restraint.
B
A
WARNING
To remove the child restraint, simply
unhook the top strap from the top tether
anchor and then disconnect the lower
anchor points.
If a LATCH-type child restraint isn’t
attached to its anchorage points, the
restraint won’t be able to protect the
child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be severely injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using
the anchorage points. If your child
restraint is not designed for the
LATCH system, use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
L3U1049A
In order to use the system, you need either
a forward-facing child restraint that has
attaching points (B) at its base and a top
tether anchor (C), or a rear-facing child
restraint that has attaching points (B), as
shown here.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
L3U1031A
If your child restraint is equipped with the
LATCH system, see “Lower Anchorages
and Top Tethers for Children (LATCH Sys-
tem)” in this section. See “Top Strap” in this
section if the child restraint has one.
L3U1052A
L3U1054A
3) Buckle the belt. Make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
5) To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor while you
push down on the child restraint. If
If your child restraint does not have the
LATCH system, you will be using the lap-
shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Be sure to follow the instruc-
tions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
you’re using
a
forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use
your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6) Push and pull the child restraint in dif-
ferent directions to be sure it is secure.
1) Put the restraint on the seat.
2) Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap
and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s
safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle
the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back
all the way. The safety belt will move freely
again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
L3U1053A
4) Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set the lock.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1) Your vehicle has a right front passen-
ger’s frontal air bag. See “Passenger
Sensing System” in this section. Always
secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat, even if the air bag is off. If
your child restraint is forward-facing,
move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing the child restraint in this
seat. See “Manual Seats” in this sec-
tion.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be severely injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s frontal air bag
inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating air bag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag under cer-
tain conditions, no system is fail-
safe, and no one can guarantee that
an air bag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it
is turned off. Always secure a rear-
facing child restraint in the rear seat,
even if the air bag is off.
L3U1068A
When the passenger sensing system
has turned off the right front passen-
ger’s frontal and side air bag, the pas-
senger air bag off indicator should light.
See “Passenger Sensing System” in
this section.
A thick layer of additional material such
as a blanket, or aftermarket equipment
such as seat covers heaters or mas-
sagers, located between the seat cush-
ion and the child restraint or small
occupant, can affect how the passenger
sensing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat cush-
ion before installing/securing the child
restraint or small occupant.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air
bag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure
a child restraint. See “Where to Put the
Restraint” in this section.
sensing system. The passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and side air bag
when an infant or a small child is detected.
See “Passenger Sensing System” and
“Manual Seats” in this section for more
information on this including important
safety information.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position,
move the seat as far back as it will go
before securing the forward-facing child
restraint. See “Manual Seats” in this sec-
tion.
2) Put the child restraint on the seat.
3) Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap
and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s
safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, you will be
using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint, even if the child restraint is
equipped with the LATCH system. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Supplemental Restraint
System (air bags)
This section explains the frontal and side
impact air bag systems.
WARNING
This section of the owner’s manual
describes the protection provided by
your
vehicle’s
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (advanced air
bags). Please read and follow ALL
these instructions carefully to mini-
mize your risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a collision.
L3U1069A
L3U1060A
4) Buckle the belt. Make sure the release
button is positioned so you would be
able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.
6) To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor while you
push down on the child restraint. You
may find it helpful to use your knee to
push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7) Push and pull the child restraint in dif-
ferent directions to be sure it is secure.
8) If the air bag is off, the passenger air
bag off indicator located in the clock
display in center of the instrument panel
will be lit.
Your vehicle has an advanced frontal air
bag for the driver and an advanced frontal
air bag for the right front passenger. Your
vehicle also has side impact air bags for
the driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-
mental Restraint System consisting of the
following components in addition to a lap-
shoulder belt at each front seating position.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle
the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back
all the way. The safety belt will move freely
again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
L3U1059A
5) Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set the lock.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Driver’s air bag
2. Front passenger’s air bag
3. Safety belt pretensioner
4. Air bag controller (SDM)
5. Occupant classification module
6. “PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF”
indicator
8
1
2
7. Air bag readiness light
8. Early crash sensor
9. Side air bag
10. Side air bag sensor
6
9
7
3
10
5
4
9
S4U1014A
10
3
The words AIR BAG will appear on the
side of the front seatback closest to the
door, to indicate the presence of a side
impact air bag.
85Z008
Frontal air bags are designed to help
reduce the risk of injury from the force of a
frontal crash. Side impact air bags are
designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of a side impact crash. But
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING
these air bags must inflate very quickly to
do their job. Here are the most important
things to know about the air bag systems.
WARNING
(Continued)
Do not attach any objects to, or place
any objects over, the steering wheel
or dashboard. Do not place any
objects between the air bag and the
driver or front passenger. These
objects may interfere with air bag
operation or may be propelled by the
air bag in the event of a crash. Either
of these conditions may cause
severe injury.
The side impact air bags are
designed to inflate only in moderate
to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They
aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in
rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear
a safety belt properly – whether or
not there’s an air bag for that person.
WARNING
You can be severely injured or killed
in a crash if you aren’t wearing your
safety belt – even if you have air
bags. Wearing your safety belt during
a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or
being ejected from it. Air bags are
designed to work with safety belts
but don’t replace them.
WARNING
WARNING
Frontal air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to
deploy only in moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crashes. They
aren’t designed to inflate at all in roll-
over, rear or low-speed frontal
crashes, or in many side crashes.
And, for some unrestrained occu-
pants, frontal air bags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful air bags have pro-
vided in the past.
Air bags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye. If
you’re too close to an inflating air
bag, as you would be if you were
leaning forward, it could severely
injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your
safety belt, even with frontal air bags.
The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining con-
trol of the vehicle. Front occupants
should not lean on or sleep against
the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any air bag when it inflates
can be severely injured or killed. Air
bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for
young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants
need the protection that
a
child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehi-
cle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Older Children” or
“Infants and Young Children.”
(Continued)
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Where Are the Air Bags?
S4U1015A
There is an air bag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the air bag
symbol.
The air bag readiness system checks the
air bag electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical
section 3 for more information.
N6U1001A
L3U1063A
The side impact air bag is in the side of the
front seatback closest to the door.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle
of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Don’t put anything between an occu-
pant and an air bag, and don’t attach
or put anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other air bag
covering. If something is between an
occupant and an air bag, the bag
might not inflate properly or it might
force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death.
The path of an inflating air bag must
be kept clear. Don’t use seat covers
on the front seats.
L3U1064A
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag
is in the instrument panel on the passen-
ger’s side.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
• there is a critical problem with the air bag
system or the passenger sensing sys-
tem.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing sys-
tem for the right front passenger position.
The passenger air bag off indicator will be
visible when you turn your ignition key to
ON or START. The words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” will be visible in the clock
display located in the center of the instru-
ment panel during the system check.
When the system check is complete, the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
should go out unless the passenger sens-
ing system has turned off the front passen-
ger’s frontal and side air bags. See
“Passenger Air bag Off Indicator” in Sec-
tion 3.
WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be severely injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s frontal air bag
inflates. This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating air bag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal air bag and side
air bag under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not
deploy under some unusual circum-
stance, even though it is turned off.
Always secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat, even if the
air bags are off.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag
and side air bag, the passenger air bag off
indicator in the clock display will light and
stay lit to remind you that the air bags are
off. See “Passenger Air Bag Off Indicator”
in Section 3.
Accident statistics show that children are
safer if they are restrained in the rear
rather than the front seat. We recommend
that child restraints be secured in the rear
seat.
For some children who have outgrown
child restraints and for very small adults,
the passenger sensing system may or may
not turn off the right front passenger’s fron-
tal air bag and side air bag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and
body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear
a safety belt properly – whether or not
there is an air bag for that person.
PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passen-
ger’s frontal air bag and side air bag when
the weight on the front seat is 25.6 kg (56.4
lbs) or less. The air bag should be turned
off in the following situations.
N5U1002AS
The passenger sensing system will turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag
and side air bag under certain conditions.
The driver’s frontal air bag and side air bag
are not part of the passenger sensing sys-
tem. The passenger sensing system works
with sensors that are part of the right front
passenger’s seat cushion. The sensors are
designed to detect the presence of a prop-
erly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s frontal air bag and side air
bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the
right front passenger’s seat, but the pas-
senger air bag off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, do one of the
following:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccu-
pied.
• the system determines that an infant or a
small child is present in the right front
passenger seat.
• a right front passenger takes his/her
weight off of the seat for a period of time.
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
position, then sit upright in the seat, cen-
tered on the seat cushion, with the per-
son’s legs comfortably extended. Restart
the vehicle and have the person remain
in this position for about three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s
air bag.
• With the vehicle parked, ask the right
front passenger to get out of the seat for
more than three seconds, place the
seatback in the fully upright position, and
then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the
passenger’s air bag.
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the sys-
tem’s designed “threshold level.”
WARNING
A thick layer of additional material
such as a blanket, or aftermarket
equipment such as seat covers, seat
heaters and seat massagers can
affect how well the passenger sens-
ing system operates. Remove any
additional material from the seat
cushion before allowing a passenger
to use the front passenger’s seat, and
do not use aftermarket equipment
such as seat covers.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into
a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the
threshold level is about 9 to 14 mph (14.5
to 23 km/h). The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so
that it can be somewhat above or below
this range.
Adding Equipment to Your Air Bag-
Equipped Vehicle
If your vehicle strikes something that will
move or deform, such as a parked car, the
threshold level will be higher. The driver’s
and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because
inflation would not help the occupant.
Question: Because I have a disability, I
have to get my vehicle modified. How
can I find out whether this will affect my
advanced air bag system?
WARNING
If the air bag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes
on and stays on, it means that some-
thing may be wrong with the air bag
system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because
an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger’s seat may not
have the protection of the air bags.
See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in
Section 3 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Answer: Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the air bag
sensing and diagnostic module can affect
the operation of the advanced air bag sys-
tem. If it is necessary to modify the
advanced air bag system to accommodate
a person with disabilities, owners in the
continental United States can call Ameri-
can Suzuki toll-free at 1-800-934-0934, or
write to:
A side impact air bag is designed to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes involv-
ing the door. A side impact air bag will
inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed “threshold level”. The
threshold level can vary with specific vehi-
cle design. A side impact air bag is not
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because
inflation would not help the occupant.
American Suzuki Motor Corporation
Automotive Customer Relations
3251 East Imperial Highway
Brea, CA 92821-6795
In any particular crash, no one can say
whether an air bag should have inflated
simply because of the damage to a vehicle
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined
by the angle of the impact and how quickly
the vehicle slows down in frontal and near-
frontal impacts. For side impact air bags,
inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,
and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the air
bag. Side impact air bags would not help
you in many types of collisions, including
frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers,
and rear impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to
severe side collisions for vehicles with side
impact air bags.
nor does it stop people from leaving the
vehicle.
WARNING
When an air bag inflates, there is dust
in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but can’t get out of the
vehicle after an air bag inflates, then
get fresh air by opening a window or
a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deploy-
ment, you should seek medical atten-
tion.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air
bag sensing system detects that the vehi-
cle is in a crash. For both frontal and side
impact air bags, the sensing system trig-
gers a release of gas from the inflator,
which inflates the air bag. The inflator, the
air bag and related hardware are all part of
the air bag modules. Frontal air bag mod-
ules are located inside the steering wheel
and instrument panel. Side impact air bag
modules are located in the side of the seat-
back closest to the door.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even
realize the air bag inflated. Some compo-
nents of the air bag module will be hot for a
short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal
air bag, the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s frontal bag and the side
of the seatback closest to the front door for
the side impact air bag. The parts of the
bag that come into contact with you may
be warm, but not too hot to touch. There
will be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from
seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
In many crashes severe enough to inflate
an air bag, windshields are broken by vehi-
cle deformation. Additional windshield
breakage may also occur from the right
front passenger air bag.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near fron-
tal collisions, even belted occupants can
contact the steering wheel or the instru-
ment panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can con-
tact the inside of the vehicle.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only
once. After an air bag inflates, you’ll
need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will
include air bag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other
parts.
The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body, stopping the
occupant more gradually. But the frontal air
bags would not help you in many types of
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which
records information about the air bag
system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation.
• Let only qualified technicians work on
your air bag system. Improper service
can mean that your air bag system won’t
work properly. See your SUZUKI dealer
for service.
have information about servicing your vehi-
cle and the air bag system.
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt
reminder light and all your belts, buckles,
latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose
or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it repaired.
WARNING
For up to 10 seconds after the igni-
tion key is turned off and the battery
is disconnected, an air bag can still
inflate during improper service. You
can be injured if you are close to an
air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of
the air bag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for
you is qualified to do so.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect
you in a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get
a new one right away.
CAUTION
If you damage the covering for the
frontal air bag, or the covering on the
front seatback for a side air bag, the
bag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the air bag module in
the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s air bag, or
both the air bag module and seatback
for the side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag
covers, and have them repaired or
replaced. (The air bag system does not
need regular maintenance.)
The air bag systems in your vehicle do not
need regular maintenance.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are air bag system parts in
several places around your vehicle. You
don’t want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your
SUZUKI dealer and the service manual
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
replaced after the side air bag has been
deployed.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace
air bag system parts.
WARNING
A crash can damage the restraint
systems in your vehicle. A damaged
restraint system may not properly
protect the person using it, resulting
in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your
restraint systems are working prop-
erly after
inspected
a
crash, have them
and any necessary
replacements made as soon as pos-
sible.
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new
belts or LATCH system parts?
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will
need to have LATCH system, safety belt or
seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts
and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also
need to replace the driver’s and right front
passenger’s safety belt pretensioners and
safety belts. Be sure to do so. Then the
new pretensioners and safety belts will be
there to help protect you in a collision.
If your vehicle is equipped with side air
bags, the front seat assembly must be
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
MEMO
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1
Doors and Locks ................................................................. 2-4
Windows .............................................................................. 2-7
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................................... 2-8
Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 2-10
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................................ 2-10
Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-20
Storage Areas ...................................................................... 2-21
Sunroof ................................................................................ 2-23
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system oper-
ates on a radio frequency subject to Fed-
eral Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
Keys
WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons. A child or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power win-
dows or other controls or even make
the vehicle move.
Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with
children.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1.This device may not cause interference,
and
2.This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
N4U2001A
One key is used for the ignition, the door
and all other locks.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
When a new vehicle is delivered, you are
provided with two keys. Keep one of the
two keys as a spare. The key number is
stamped on the key tag (A). The tag has a
code on it that tells your SUZUKI dealer or
a qualified locksmith how to make extra
keys. If you lose your key, you’ll be able to
have a new one made easily using the tag.
For vehicle security, keep the tag in a safe
place and also record the key number
somewhere other than inside of the vehi-
cle.
1.This device may not cause interference,
and
2.This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to this system by
other than an authorized service facility
could void authorization to use this equip-
ment.
L3U2001A
If you need a new key, contact your
SUZUKI dealer who can obtain the correct
key code.
At times you may notice a decrease in
range. This is normal for any remote key-
less entry system. If the transmitter does
not work or if you have to stand closer to
your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try
this:
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
indicator located on the driver’s door lock
will turn off.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to
stand closer during rainy or snowy
weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or
objects may be blocking the signal. Take
a few steps to the left or right, hold the
transmitter higher, and try again.
If a door is not opened or if the engine is
not started within 30 seconds after press-
ing Unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, all of the doors will automati-
cally relock and the theft-deterrent system
will reactivate.
• Check to determine if battery replace-
ment is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless
Entry System Operation in this section.
• If you are still having trouble, see your
SUZUKI dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
(PANIC):
Press this button to turn on the panic alarm
feature. The hazard lamps will flash and
the panic alarm will stay on for about 28
seconds unless you press the Panic button
again.
(A)
N4U2002BS
The LED (A) on the transmitter will flash
when the transmitter button is pressed.
The following functions are available if your
vehicle has the remote keyless entry sys-
tem:
The Lock and Unlock buttons will not oper-
ate and the theft-deterrent system will not
activate while the key is in the ignition.
(LOCK):
Press this button to lock all of the doors. If
all of the doors are closed, the hazard
lamps will flash once and the horn will
chirp to indicate that locking has occurred.
The theft-deterrent system will activate and
the security indicator located on the
driver’s door lock will flash.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is
coded to prevent another transmitter from
unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be pur-
chased through your SUZUKI dealer.
Remember to bring any remaining trans-
mitters with you when you go to your
SUZUKI dealer. When the dealer matches
the replacement transmitter to your vehi-
cle, any remaining transmitters must also
be matched. Once your SUZUKI dealer
has coded the new transmitter, the lost
(UNLOCK):
Press this button to unlock all of the doors.
If all of the doors are closed, the hazard
lamps will flash twice to indicate that
unlocking has occurred. The theft-deter-
rent system will deactivate and the security
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
6) Check the operation of the transmitter
with your vehicle.
WARNING
Battery Replacement
Swallowing a lithium battery may
cause serious internal injury. Do not
allow anyone to swallow a lithium
battery. Keep lithium batteries away
from children and pets. If swallowed,
contact physician immediately.
Under normal use, the battery in your
remote keyless entry transmitter should
last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the LED
(A) fails to illuminate or if the transmitter
won’t work at the normal range in any loca-
tion. If you have to get close to your vehicle
before the transmitter works, it’s probably
time to change the battery.
CAUTION
N5U2001A
The transmitter is a sensitive elec-
tronic instrument. To avoid damaging
the transmitter, do not expose it to
dust or moisture or tamper with inter-
nal parts.
To replace the battery in the remote key-
less entry transmitter, do the following:
CAUTION
When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry.
Static from your body transferred to
these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
1) Remove the screw from the back of the
cover and open the cover of the trans-
mitter.
2) Pull the transmitter unit out of the cover
and open the cover of the transmitter
unit.
3) Remove the battery and replace it with
the new one. Make sure the positive(+)
side of the battery faces up. Use one
three-volt, CR1616, or equivalent, type
battery.
4) Close the cover of the transmitter unit
and put the unit in the cover of the
transmitter.
5) Assemble the transmitter cover and
replace the screw. Make sure the cover
is on tightly, so water won’t get in.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
WARNING
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers – especially children –
can easily open the doors and fall
out of a moving vehicle. When a
door is locked, the handle won’t
open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock
the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be unable to
get out. A child can be overcome by
extreme heat and can suffer perma-
nent injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock your vehi-
cle whenever you leave it.
N4U2004A
N4U2005A
From the outside, use your key or the
optional keyless entry transmitter. See
“Remote Keyless Entry System” in this
section.
All doors, except the driver’s door, can be
locked from the outside by pushing down
the manual door lock and then closing the
door. The driver’s door lock cannot be
pushed in while the door is open. Upon
leaving the vehicle, the driver’s door can be
locked from the outside only by using the
key or the optional remote keyless entry
transmitter.
To manually unlock all of the doors from
the outside, insert the key and turn it
toward the front of the vehicle.
• Outsiders can easily enter through
an unlocked door when you slow
down or stop your vehicle. Locking
your doors can help prevent this
from happening.
To manually lock all of the doors from the
outside, insert the key and turn it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
If your vehicle has a security indicator, the
indicator will turn off when you unlock the
door using the key or the optional keyless
entry transmitter. The indicator will turn on
when you lock the door using the key or
the keyless entry transmitter. The security
indicator is located on the driver’s door
lock.
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
From the inside, you can lock and unlock
all of the doors by pushing or pulling the
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
manual door lock located on the window
sill on each door.
Power Door Locks
Door Ajar Reminder
From the inside, you can also lock and
unlock the doors with the power door lock
switches located on the driver’s door trim
pad.
S4U2029A
CAUTION
If there is noise when opening or
closing the doors or while driving,
apply grease to door latch and hinge.
If one of the doors on your vehicle is not
closed completely while the ignition is on,
the door ajar light on the instrument panel
will come on and stay on until the doors
are closed and completely latched.
Central Door Locking System
N4U2006A
The central door locking system is acti-
vated using the switch on the driver’s door.
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle has this feature you can
unlock or lock the doors on your vehicle
using the driver’s door lock switch. Push
down the front part of the switch to unlock
the doors. Push down the back part of the
switch to lock the doors.
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door
security locks on each rear door. This fea-
ture helps prevent passengers from open-
ing the rear doors on your vehicle from the
inside.
From the outside, you can lock or unlock all
of the doors on your vehicle from the
driver’s door by using either the key or the
optional keyless entry transmitter. From the
inside, you can lock or unlock all of the
doors using the driver’s power door lock
switch.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Liftgate
Using the Rear Door Security Lock
Opening a Rear Door When the Security
Lock is On
1) Unlock the door from the inside.
2) Then open the door from the outside.
WARNING
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monox-
ide (CO) gas can come into your vehi-
cle. You can’t see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the lift-
gate open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body
and the liftgate:
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature,
adults or older children who ride in the rear
won’t be able to open the rear door from
the inside. You should let adults and older
children know how to cancel the locks.
Canceling the Rear Door Security Lock
1) Unlock the door from the inside and
open the door from the outside.
2) Move the lock downward to the unlock
position.
• Make sure all other windows are
shut.
N4U2007B
3) Do the same for the other rear door.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
and select the control setting that
will force outside air into your vehi-
cle. See “Climate Control System”
in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way. See “Engine Exhaust” in
the Index.
To activate the rear door security lock:
The rear door lock will now work normally.
1) Move the lock upward to the lock posi-
tion.
Lockout Protection
2) Close the door.
If your vehicle is equipped with remote key-
less entry, you have lockout protection.
This feature stops the driver’s door from
locking when the power door lock switch is
pressed with the driver’s door open.
3) Do the same thing to the other rear
door lock.
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside door handle
when the rear door security locks are
engaged. The inside door handle
could be damaged.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your
keys. All of the doors, except for the
driver’s door, can be locked from the out-
side by pushing the door lock down and
then closing the door. The driver’s door
can be locked from the outside only with
the key or by using the optional keyless
entry transmitter.
The rear doors on your vehicle cannot be
opened from the inside when this feature is
in use.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Power Windows
Windows
WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
A
child can be overcome by the
extreme heat and can suffer perma-
nent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child alone in a
vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
N4U2026A
N4U2010A
To open the liftgate from outside of the
and turn it clockwise. Then pull up the han-
dle above the license plate to open the lift-
gate.
If your vehicle has this feature, the power
window switches are located on the arm-
rest on the driver’s door. In addition, each
passenger door has a switch for its own
window. The ignition must be ON to use
the power windows.
When closing the liftgate, close from the
center to ensure it fully latches. Although
you may use one hand to unlock the lift-
gate, it is recommended that two hands on
the upper surface be used to close the lift-
gate.
To lower a window, press and hold the
switch until the window reaches the
desired position. To raise the window, pull
up and hold the switch till the window
reaches the desired position.
L3U2011A
To lock the liftgate, insert the key into the
lock cylinder and turn it counterclockwise.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the
window crank to open and close each win-
dow.
The liftgate can also be locked or unlocked
using the central door locking system. See
“Central Door Locking System” in this sec-
tion.
The rear windows do not open fully.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Express-Down Window
The driver’s window also has an express-
down feature.
Sun Visors
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in
some cities. Although your vehicle has a
number of theft-deterrent features, we
know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
This switch is labeled AUTO. Press the
switch then release it and the driver’s win-
dow will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering,
press the switch again. To raise the win-
dow, pull up and hold the switch.
Theft-Deterrent System
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent
system.
Window Lockout
Arming the System
To arm the system, do the following:
S4U2013A
1) Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
and remove the key from the ignition. If
the key is inserted in the ignition switch,
the transmitter will not operate the theft-
deterrent system.
To block out glare, you can swing down the
visors. You can also remove them from the
center mount and swing them to the side.
2) Close the doors, the windows, the
hood, and the trunk. Make sure the win-
dows are closed, as the system can be
activated even if the windows are open.
3) Lock the doors using the remote key-
less entry transmitter. The transmitter
must be used to activate the theft-deter-
rent system.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has vanity mirrors located on
the back of the sun visors. Swing down the
sun visor to expose the vanity mirror.
N4U2011A
The driver’s power window controls also
include a lockout button.
– The LED on the transmitter will flash
once.
– All of the doors will lock.
– The hazard warning lamps will flash
once and the horn will chirp.
– The theft-deterrent mode will activate.
Press the lockout button to disable the
front and rear passenger window switches.
The driver can still operate all the windows
with the lock on. Press the lockout button
again to return to normal window opera-
tion.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
The theft-deterrent system will not arm
when you lock the doors using the key or
the manual door lock. It arms only when
you use the remote keyless entry transmit-
ter.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
If the system alarm is active, it can be
deactivated using the following methods:
• Press the Lock or Unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front
door using the key.
Disarming the System
To disarm the system, do the following:
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front
door using the key, or
• Press the Unlock button on the transmit-
ter.
Otherwise, the alarm will automatically
stop after 30 seconds. The system will
then lock the doors and reactivate the
theft-deterrent system.
A
N4U2012A
– The LED on the transmitter will flash
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the hazard lamps flash once when the
Lock or Unlock button on your transmitter
is pressed, that means the theft-security
system alarm was triggered while you
were away.
once.
– The security light (A) will flash once
theft-deterrent system is armed. The
security light is located on the driver’s
door lock.
– All of the doors will unlock.
– The hazard warning lamps will flash
twice.
– The theft-deterrent mode will deacti-
vate.
To avoid activating the alarm by accident,
do the following:
How the System Alarm is Activated
If a door or the trunk is opened without the
key or the remote keyless entry transmitter,
the horn will sound and the lamps will flash
for up to 30 seconds.
• Lock the vehicle with the key or the man-
ual door lock after the doors are closed if
you don’t want to arm the theft-deterrent
system.
• Unlock the driver’s or passenger’s front
door with the key or use the remote key-
less entry transmitter. Pressing the
UNLOCK button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter disables the theft-deter-
rent system. Unlocking a door any other
way will activate the alarm when a door
or the trunk is opened.
The theft-deterrent system won’t arm if you
lock the doors with the key or use the man-
ual door lock. It activates only if you use
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
If the door is not opened or if the engine is
not started within 30 seconds after disarm-
ing the system with the transmitter, all of
the doors will automatically lock and the
theft-deterrent mode will reactivate.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
12)Check all gauges.
13)Make sure that the BRAKE light turns
off when the parking brake is released.
Daily Inspection Checklist
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
Before Driving
1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights
and reflectors are clean and unob-
structed.
New Vehicle Break-In
Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel
tank, perform the following under-hood
checks:
CAUTION
2) Visually check the tires for the following
points:
– the depth of the tread groove
– abnormal wear, cracks and damage
– loose wheel nuts
– existence of foreign material such as
nails, stones, etc.
Refer to “Tires” in the “SERVICE AND
APPEARANCE CARE” section for details.
3) Look for oil or other fluid leaks.
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elabo-
rate “break-in.” But it will perform
better in the long run if you follow
these guidelines:
1) Engine oil level
2) Coolant level
3) Brake fluid level
4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level
5) Windshield washer fluid level
6) Hood latch operation
• Don’t drive at any one speed – fast
or slow – for the first 500 miles (805
km). Don’t make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the
first 200 miles (322 km) or so. Dur-
ing this time your new brake linings
aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean prema-
ture wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this break-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Pull the hood release handle inside the
vehicle. Make sure that you cannot
open the hood all the way without
releasing the secondary latch. Be sure
to close the hood securely after check-
ing for proper latch operation. See the
item “Lubricate Locks, Hinges & Hood
Latch” under “Chassis and Body” in the
“MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE” section
for the lubrication schedule.
NOTE:
It is normal for water to drip from the air
conditioning system after use.
4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and
latched.
5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,
brake lights and horn for proper opera-
tion.
6) Lock all doors.
7) Adjust the seat and adjustable head
restraints (if equipped).
8) Check the brake pedal.
9) Adjust the mirrors.
10)Make sure that you and all passengers
have properly fastened your seat belts.
11)Make sure that all warning lights come
on as the key is turned to the “ON” or
“START” position.
WARNING
Make sure the hood is fully closed
and latched before driving. If it is not,
it can fly up unexpectedly during
driving, obstructing your view and
resulting in an accident.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Ignition Positions
LOCK:
Starting Your Engine
This position locks your steering wheel,
ignition, automatic transmission shift lever
and automatic transmission. This is the
only position from which you can remove
the key. For easier key operation when
unlocking the steering wheel, move the
steering wheel back and forth while turning
the key to the ACC position.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEU-
TRAL (N). Your engine won’t start in any
other position – that’s a safety feature. To
restart when you’re already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
S4U2015A
CAUTION
With the key in the ignition switch, you can
turn the key to four different positions.
ACC (ACCESSORY):
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you
could damage the transmission. Shift
to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is
stopped.
This position operates some of your elec-
trical accessories, such as the radio, but
not the ventilation fan. Press in the switch
as you turn it away from you.
WARNING
On manual transmission vehicles,
turning the key to LOCK and remov-
and result in a loss of ability to steer
the vehicle. This could cause a colli-
sion. If you need to turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn
the key only to ACC. Don’t push the
key in while the vehicle is moving.
ON:
This is the position to which the switch
returns after you start your engine and
release the key. The switch stays in ON
when the engine is running. But even when
the engine is not running, you can use ON
to operate your electrical accessories, and
to display some instrument panel warning
lights.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the
clutch pedal to the floor and start the
engine. Your vehicle won’t start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
Starting Your Engine
1) With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
turn your ignition key to START. When
the engine starts, let go of the key. The
idle speed will go down as your engine
gets warm.
START:
CAUTION
This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch will return to ON for normal driving.
Do not turn the key to START if the engine
is running.
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and
you can’t turn it, be sure you are
using the correct key; if so, is it all
the way in? If it is, then turn the steer-
ing wheel left and right while you turn
the key hard. Turn the key only with
your hand. Using a tool to force it
could break the key or the ignition
switch. If none of these works, then
your vehicle needs service.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC and
ON allow you to operate electrical acces-
sories, such as the radio.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
by blocking the straight movement of the
shift lever when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause
your battery to be drained much
sooner. And the excessive heat can
damage your starter motor. Wait
about 15 seconds between each try
to help avoid draining your battery or
damaging your starter.
Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you
add electrical parts or accessories,
you could change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your SUZUKI
dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
PARK (P):
This position locks your front wheels. It’s
the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle can’t
move easily. Also, this is the only position
from which you can remove the key after
turning it to LOCK.
WARNING
2) If it doesn’t start, wait about 15 seconds
and try again to start the engine by
turning the ignition key to START. Wait
about 15 seconds between each try.
When your engine has run about 10
seconds to warm up, your vehicle is
ready to be driven. Don’t “race” your
engine when it’s cold. If the weather is
below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let the
engine run for a few minutes to warm
up.
3) If your engine still won’t start (or starts
but then stops), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing your
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing, but this time
keep the pedal down for five or six sec-
onds. This clears the extra gasoline
from the engine.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic transmission, the shift lever is
located on the console between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake
firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be injured. To be sure
your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the
shift lever to PARK (P). See “Shifting
Into Park (P)” in the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle
has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to apply your reg-
ular brakes before you can shift from PARK
(P) when the ignition is in the ON position.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever – push the shift
N4U2014A
Movement between certain positions
requires pushing the shift lever to the pas-
senger side while shifting. This prevents
you from changing positions unexpectedly
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
lever all the way into PARK (P) – as you
maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you wish. See
“Shifting Out of Park (P)” on a later page in
this section.
SECOND (2):
This position gives you more power than
THIRD (3) but lower fuel economy. You can
use SECOND (2) on hills. It can help con-
trol your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also
want to use your brakes off and on.
WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is “racing” (running at high
speed) is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You
could lose control and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift into a drive gear
while your engine is racing.
REVERSE (R):
Use this gear to back up. In order to move
from NEUTRAL (N) to REVERSE (R), you
must press down on the shift lever while
shifting.
CAUTION
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) at speeds
over 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can
damage your transmission. Use
THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC OVER-
DRIVE (D) as much as possible. Don’t
shift into SECOND (2) unless you are
going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h)
or you can damage your engine.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could dam-
age your transmission. The repairs
ranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped.
Damage to your transmission caused
by shifting into a drive gear with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not
racing when shifting your vehicle.
FIRST (1):
This position gives you even more power
than SECOND (2) but lower fuel economy.
You can use it on very steep hills, or in
deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put
in FIRST (1), the transmission won’t shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get
out of snow, ice or sand without damaging
your transmission, see “If You Are Stuck: In
Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in section 4.
This position is for normal driving.
THIRD (3):
This position is also used for normal driv-
ing, however, it offers more power and
lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some times
you might choose THIRD (3) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
NEUTRAL (N):
In this position, your engine doesn’t con-
nect with the wheels. To restart when
you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)
only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your
vehicle is being towed.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When doing down a steep hill.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
CAUTION
Fuzzy Function
Your automatic transmission will automati-
cally select a adaptive shift pattern using
fuzzy logic.
CAUTION
If your front wheels won’t turn, don’t
try to drive. This might happen if you
were stuck in very deep sand or mud
or were up against a solid object. You
could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill,
don’t hold your vehicle there with
only the accelerator pedal. This could
overheat and damage the transmis-
sion. Use your brakes to hold your
vehicle in position on a hill.
The first few shifts may be somewhat
rough on a new vehicle. This is nor-
mal condition and shift feel will
improve soon because the automatic
transmission control system per-
forms adaptation functions.
• Economy mode is applied as often as
possible.
Emergency Operation
Economy
Medium
Load 1
Sport
If the automatic transmission experiences
a malfunction, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) or the HOLD mode light may
come on or may blink. In this situation,
automatic shifting can be canceled or can
default to a severe condition mode.
Load 2
You should consult your SUZUKI dealer
and have the problem repaired as soon as
possible when this condition occurs.
Load 3
L3U2037AS
Hold Mode
• Driver adaptive shift patterns are acti-
vated for a minimum time.
• “Load 1” is designed for a driving on
moderate road gradients.
• “Load 2” is active while going up steep
hills.
You can select this mode to drive with
some characteristics of a manual transmis-
sion. With the HOLD mode turned on, the
automatic transmission will stay in a spe-
cific gear range.
• “Load 3” is intended for downhill driving
for better engine braking.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
Selector Lever
Position
Gear range
nd
rd
th
th
2
↔ 3 ↔ 4
R
1
3
5
D
3
(mainly 4 gear)
nd
rd
rd
2
↔ 3
(mainly 3 gear)
2
4
nd
S4U2019A
2
1
2
1
(fixed)
(fixed)
st
This is your shift pattern.
Here’s how to operate your manual trans-
mission:
Function Features of HOLD Mode
N4U2015A
Winter function
FIRST (1):
Press the HOLD button on the shift lever to
When a vehicle is on a slippery road such
as one that is covered with snow, mud etc.,
the vehicle can be easily overcome the
slippery road conditions by activating the
hold mode with the transmission selector
lever in the D, 3 or 2-position.
Press the clutch pedal and shift into FIRST
(1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
While on, the HOLD indicator light on the
instrument panel will light up. See “Hold
Mode Light” in section 3. Press the button
again to turn off the HOLD mode, and
return to normal automatic transmission
operation.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re
going less than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve
come to a complete stop and it’s hard to
shift into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into
FIRST (1).
To avoid busy shifting
Fuzzy logic is applied to avoid busy shifting
in most hilly driving conditions. Using the
HOLD button & shifting into the 3-position
are other ways to avoid busy shifting in
case fuzzy logic is not sufficient.
When the hold mode is activated, the
transmission operates as follows:
SECOND (2):
Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND
(2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
Driving like manual transmission
When in the hold mode condition, you can
use the automatic transmission as a 4-
speed manual transmission.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5):
Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and
FIFTH (5), the same way you do for SEC-
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
OND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
Shift Speed
lever up until you can press the release
button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
WARNING
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and
press the brake pedal. Just before the
vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and
brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
If you skip a gear when you down-
shift, you could lose control of your
vehicle. You could injure yourself or
others. Don’t shift down more than
one gear at a time when you down-
shift.
Winter parking tip
Under cold weather conditions, the parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen if the brakes
are wet.
NEUTRAL:
Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
If there is a risk that the parking brake may
freeze after driving through water deep
enough to wet brake components or after
having the vehicle washed:
Parking Brake
REVERSE (R):
To back up, press down the clutch pedal,
lift up the ring on the shift lever and shift
into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator
pedal.
1) Apply the parking brake only tempo-
rarily while you put the gear selector
lever in PARK (P) (for automatic tran-
saxle) or in first or reverse gear (for
manual transaxle).
2) Block the rear wheels with wedge
blocks.
3) Release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Shift into REVERSE (R) only after
your vehicle is stopped. Shifting into
REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving could damage your transmis-
sion. The repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty.
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on can
cause your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to replace them, and
you could also damage other parts of
your vehicle. Verify that the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
N4U2016A
The parking brake lever is located between
the bucket seats.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the
parking brake, for parking your vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake
pedal down and pull up on the parking
brake lever. If the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on.
To release the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down. Pull the parking brake
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Leaving Your Vehicle with the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
Shifting Into Park (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t
shift your transmission into PARK (P) prop-
erly, the weight of the vehicle may put too
much force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. You may find it difficult to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is
called “torque lock.” To prevent torque lock,
set the parking brake and then shift into
PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting
Into Park (P)” in this section.
(Automatic Transmission)
WARNING
WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave your
vehicle with the engine running. Your
vehicle could move suddenly if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the
engine running, it could overheat and
even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle
with the engine running.
It is dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake
firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. Don’t
leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you
have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or
others could be injured. To be sure
your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow.
When you are ready to drive, move the
shift lever out of PARK (P) before you
release the parking brake.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the
engine running, be sure your vehicle is in
PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly
set before you leave it. After you’ve moved
the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regu-
lar brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the button. If you can,
it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully
locked into PARK (P).
If torque lock does occur, you may need to
have another vehicle push yours a little
uphill to take some of the pressure from
the parking pawl in the transmission, so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
1) Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2) Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position.
3) Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4) Remove the key and take it with you. If
you can leave your vehicle with the igni-
tion key in your hand, your vehicle is in
PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has a brake transmission shift
interlock system which locks the shift lever
in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the
LOCK position. You have to apply your reg-
ular brakes before you can shift from PARK
(P) when the ignition is in the ON position.
See “Automatic Transmission Operation” in
this section.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P) while
you hold the brake pedal down, try this:
1) Set the parking brake fully.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
2) Turn the key to LOCK and remove the
key from the ignition switch.
3) Remove the hole cover from the shift
lock slot with a screwdriver
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Before leaving your vehicle, do the follow-
ing:
Parking Over Things That Can Burn
1) Hold the brake pedal down and firmly
apply the parking brake.
2) Fully press in the clutch pedal and
place the shift lever into the appropriate
position as stated below:
– When parking on level ground, place
the shift lever into FIRST(1) or
REVERSE(R).
– When parking downhill, place the shift
lever in REVERSE (R).
L3U2020A
– When parking uphill, place the shift
lever in FIRST (1).
3) After shifting to the appropriate posi-
tion, turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch.
WARNING
N4U2017A
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Don’t park over papers,
leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
4) Insert the key into the shift lock slot and
press and hold it.
5) Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
6) Remove the key from the slot, insert it
into the ignition switch and start the
engine.
7) Apply and hold the regular brake fully
and release the parking brake.
8) Shift to the drive gear you want.
9) Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you
can.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Engine Exhaust
WARNING
Running Your Engine While You Are
Parked
WARNING
It’s better not to park with the engine run-
ning. But if you ever have to, here are
some things to know.
It is dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) or the appropriate position
with the parking brake firmly set.
Your vehicle can roll. To determine
the appropriate position, see “Park-
ing Your Vehicle”. Don’t leave your
vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P) or the appropriate position
as described under “Parking Your
Vehicle”.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains
the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which
you can’t see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds
strange or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a col-
lision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the
road or over road debris.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had
been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is com-
ing into your vehicle:
WARNING
Idling the engine with the climate
control system off could allow dan-
gerous exhaust into your vehicle. See
the earlier Warning under “Engine
Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can
let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into
your vehicle even if the climate con-
trol fan is at the highest setting. One
place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust – with CO – can come in eas-
ily. NEVER park in a garage with the
engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a bliz-
zard. See “Winter Driving” in the
Index.
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immedi-
ately.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your
vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into Park
(P)” or “Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)” in this section.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Manual Mirror
Mirrors
The outside rearview mirrors should be
adjusted so you can see a little of the side
of your vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driv-
ing position, adjust the mirror so you can
see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip the
mirror in the center to move it up or down
and from side to side.
N4U2019A
If your vehicle has this feature, the control
for the power mirrors is located on the
driver’s side door trim.
N4U2018A
Move the outside power mirror control to
“L” to adjust the left mirror and to “R” to
adjust the right mirror. If you place the con-
trol in the center position, no movement of
the mirror will occur. To adjust a mirror,
press the corresponding edges located on
the four-way control pad to move the mirror
in the direction that you want it to go. The
ignition must be to ON to adjust the mir-
rors.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the control
levers on the driver’s and passenger’s
doors.
L3U2021A
The day/night adjustment allows you to
adjust the mirror to avoid glare from any
headlamps behind you. Push or pull the
tab for daytime/night use.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded
flat against the side of the vehicle by push-
ing them toward the vehicle.
The outside rearview mirrors can be folded
flat against the side of the vehicle by push-
ing them toward the vehicle.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Outside Convex Mirror
Cupholder(s)
Storage Areas
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A
convex mirror’s surface is curved so you
can see more from the driver’s seat.
The cupholders are located in the center
console and in the rear seat center arm-
rest.
Glove Box
The glove box is located in front of the pas-
senger’s seat on the instrument panel.
WARNING
A convex mirror can make things
(like other vehicles) look farther away
than they really are. If you cut too
sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on your right. Check
your inside mirror or glance over
your shoulder before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
operate the rear window defogger, the
heated driver’s and passenger’s outside
power mirrors are warmed to help clear
them of ice and snow. See “Rear Window
and Outside Mirror Defogger” under “Cli-
mate Control System” in section 3 for more
information.
N4U2021A
S4U2020A
To use the front cupholder, move the inner
support forward or backward. If your vehi-
cle has rear cupholders, push down the
rear seat center armrest to use them.
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom
of the handle upward. Close the glove box
with a firm push.
WARNING
Never drive with the glove box lid
open. It could cause injury if an acci-
dent occurs.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Front Armrest Storage Area
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
Front Storage Area
S4U2026A
N4U2022A
N4U2023A
The sunglasses storage compartment is
located above the driver’s door.
Your vehicle may have a sliding storage
tray located under the front passenger
seat. To use the tray, pull up on the end of
the tray and pull it toward the instrument
panel. Push the tray toward the seat to
return it to its original position.
Your vehicle has a front armrest storage
area. To open the storage area, pull up on
the lift lever and raise the lid. To close the
storage area, lower the lid and push it
down until it latches securely.
To open the sunglasses storage compart-
ment, pull down and hold the upper part of
the cover. To close the compartment, let go
of the cover and the compartment will
automatically close.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
Rear Seat Armrest
Sunroof
Your vehicle’s rear seat armrest may con-
tain two cupholders. To access the cup-
holders, pull the armrest down from the
rear seatback.
WARNING
If your vehicle has this feature, the switch
is located between the map lamp buttons.
The sunroof will only operate when the
ignition is in the ON position. The sunroof
can be opened to a vent position or it can
be opened all the way.
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in
some tinting materials will interfere
with or distort the incoming radio
reception. Any damage caused to
your antenna due to metallic tinting
materials will not be covered by your
warranty.
Antenna
The antenna is located in the windshield
glass. Be sure that the inside surface of the
windshield glass is not scratched and that
the lines on the glass are not damaged. If
the inside surface is damaged, it could
interfere with radio reception.
You must manually open and close the
sunroof cover.
If you choose to add a cellular telephone to
your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be
attached to the glass, be sure that you do
not damage the grid lines for the antenna.
There is enough space between the lines
to attach a cellular telephone antenna with-
out interfering with radio reception.
Because this antenna is built into your
windshield glass, there is a reduced risk of
damage caused by car washes and van-
dals.
WARNING
Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting to
the back glass. The metallic film in some
tinting materials will interfere with or distort
the incoming radio reception. Care must
be taken when cleaning the rear window or
windshield glass to avoid causing breaks in
the resistive material heating element
which can adversely affect radio and
defogger performance. See your SUZUKI
dealer for details.
Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window or wind-
shield glass may damage the antenna
and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not clear the inside
of the windshield glass or rear win-
dow with sharp objects.
N4U2024A
To open the sunroof to the vent position,
push the front part of the switch. To return
the sunroof to its original position, push the
rear part of the switch and hold it until the
sunroof reaches the desired position.
To fully open the sunroof, push the rear
part of the switch. The sunroof will open
automatically until you push either the front
or the rear part of the switch again. To
close the sunroof, push the front part of the
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
switch and hold it until the sunroof is
closed. The sunroof will stop if the switch is
released during operation.
In both the vent and fully open positions,
the air flow can be adjusted for driving
comfort by pushing and holding the switch
until the sunroof moves to the desired posi-
tion.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened
or closed if your vehicle has an electrical
failure.
WARNING
• Never allow any part of your body
such as hands or head to stick out
of the sunroof opening while the
vehicle is moving.
• Be sure there are no hands or other
obstructions in the path of the sun-
roof when you close the sunroof.
• Always remove the ignition key
when leaving the vehicle even if for
a short time. Also do not leave chil-
dren alone in a parked vehicle.
Unattended children could use the
sunroof switches and get trapped
by the sunroof.
• Do not put your body weight on the
roof around the sunroof such as by
sitting on it.
• When leaving the vehicle unat-
tended, close the sunroof fully.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FEATURES AND CONTROLS
MEMO
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel Overview ................................................ 3-1
Climate Controls ................................................................. 3-12
Warning Lights, Gauges and Indicators ........................... 3-18
Audio System ...................................................................... 3-29
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel Overview
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
N4U3045A
A. Air Outlet
B. Instrument Panel Cluster
C. Air Outlet
F. Audio System
G. Instrument Panel Brightness Control
H. Hood Release
K. Cigarette Lighter
L. Glove Box
D. Hazard Warning Flashers Button
E. Digital Clock
I. Climate Control System
J. Ashtray
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set
one up at the side of the road about 300
feet (100m) behind your vehicle.
Horn
N4U3002BS
You can sound the horn by pressing the
horn symbol on your steering wheel.
The hazard warning flasher button is
located on the center of the instrument
panel.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn
others. They also let police know you have
a problem. Your front and rear turn signal
lamps will flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no mat-
ter what position your key is in, and even if
the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear
turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press
the button again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on,
your turn signals won’t work. Make sure
the hazard warning flasher button is turned
off all the way for normal turn signal opera-
tion.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Your vehicle has a tilt wheel which allows
you to adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can raise it to the highest level to
give your legs more room when you exit
and enter the vehicle.
N6U3002A
N6U3001A
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way
up or down. When the turn is finished, the
lever will return automatically.
The lever on the left side of the steering
column includes the following:
• Turn and Lane-Change Signals
• Fog Lamps, if available
• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
• Flash-to-Pass
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering
wheel is located under the steering col-
umn.
For information on the exterior lamps, see
“Exterior Lamps” in this section.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and push
the lever away from you. Then, move the
wheel to a comfortable position and pull
the lever toward you to lock the wheel in
place.
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction of the turn or lane
change.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has three positions. The
upward and downward positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change. At the
center position, the turn signal is off.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower
the lever until the arrow starts to flash.
Hold it there until you complete your lane
change. The lever will return by itself when
you release it.
WARNING
Never attempt to adjust the steering
wheel height while the vehicle is
moving or you could lose control of
the vehicle.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if
the arrows flash rapidly, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see
your turn signal.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
The windshield wiper/washer lever is
located on the right side of the steering
wheel.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help
avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on
at all when you signal a turn, check for
burned-out bulbs and then check the fuse.
See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in sec-
tion 5.
Windshield Wiper
When the high beams are on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster also will be on if
the ignition is ON.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from high beam
to low beam, pull the turn signal/multifunc-
tion lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you
that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction
lever toward you until the high-beam head-
lamps come on, then release the lever to
turn them off.
Use the windshield wiper/washer lever to
operate the windshield wipers.
HI (High Speed):
Move the lever to this position for wiping at
high speed.
N6U3003A
LO (Low Speed):
Move the lever to this position for steady
wiping at low speed.
To change the headlamps from low beam
to high beam, push the turn signal multi-
function lever away from you.
INT (Intermittent):
Move the lever to this position to choose a
delayed wiping cycle. Turn the band on the
windshield wiper lever toward FAST or
SLOW for a shorter or longer delay
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
between wipes. The wiper speed can only
be adjusted when the lever is in the INT
position.
Windshield Washer
WARNING
• In freezing weather, don’t use your
washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the wind-
shield, blocking your vision.
• Do not use radiator antifreeze in
the windshield washer reservoir. It
can severely impair visibility when
sprayed on the windshield, and can
also damage your vehicle’s paint.
OFF (Off):
Move the lever to this position to turn off
the windshield wipers.
Misting Function
Move the lever toward, but not completely
in, the INT position for a single wiping
cycle. Hold it there until the windshield wip-
ers start; then let go. The windshield wip-
ers will stop after one cycle. If you want
more wipes, hold the lever toward the INT
position longer.
To wash your windshield, pull the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever toward you with
the ignition in the ON position.
Remember that damaged wiper blades
may prevent you from seeing well enough
clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them.
When you release the lever, the washers
will stop, but the wipers will continue to
wipe for about three cycles and will either
stop or will resume the speed you were
using before.
If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do
become damaged, get new blades or
blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper
motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor
until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to
prevent an overload.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
CAUTION
Cruise Control
To help prevent damage to wind-
shield wiper and washer system
components, you should take the fol-
lowing precautions:
• Do not continue to hold in the lever
when there is no windshield
washer fluid being sprayed or the
washer motor can be damaged.
• Do not attempt to remove dirt from
a dry windshield with the wipers or
you can damage the windshield
and the wiper blades. Always wet
the windshield with washer fluid
before operating the wipers.
• Clear ice or packed snow from the
wiper blades before using the wip-
ers.
• Check the washer fluid level regu-
larly. Check it often when the
weather is bad.
If your vehicle has cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about 24 mph (39 km/
h) or more without keeping your foot on the
accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at
speeds below 24 mph (39 km/h).
AST
F
W
SLO
When you apply your brakes, or depress
the clutch pedal if you have a manual
transmission, the cruise control shuts off.
N4U30460A
WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at a
steady speed. So, do not use your
cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise con-
trol on slippery roads.
If your vehicle has this feature, operate the
rear window washer/wiper system by
pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
away from you. The wiper operates contin-
uously when the lever is in the first posi-
tion.
Washer fluid sprays onto the rear window
and the wiper operates continuously when
the lever is pushed to the second position.
• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir
3/4 full during cold weather to allow
room for expansion if the tempera-
ture falls low enough to freeze the
solution.
WARNING
• Do not spray washer fluid on the
liftgate window in freezing weather.
• Warm the tailgate window before
you operate the liftgate window
washer.
Washer fluid can form ice on a frozen
liftgate window and obstruct your
vision.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Setting Cruise Control
WARNING
the cruise control is on. See “Cruise
Control Light” in this section.
the RESUME button and then release it.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. The
accelerate feature will only work after
you turn on the cruise control by press-
ing the SET button.
4) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you leave your cruise control on
when you are not using cruise, you
might hit a button and go into cruise
when you do not want to. You could
be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off
until you want to use cruise control.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a
desired speed and then you apply the
brake pedal, or depress the clutch pedal if
you have a manual transmission. This, of
course, shuts off the cruise control. But
you do not need to reset it. Once you are
going about 24 mph (39 km/h) or more,
you can tap the RESUME button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed
while using cruise control:
• Press the SET button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, tap
the SET button. Each time you do this,
you will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
slower.
You will go right back up to your chosen
speed and stay there.
If you hold in the RESUME button longer,
the vehicle will keep going faster until you
release the button or apply the brake
pedal. So unless you want to go faster, do
not hold in the RESUME button.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your
speed. When you take your foot off the
pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the
cruise control speed you set earlier.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
G7U3001A
There are two ways to go to a higher
speed:
Using Cruise Control on Hills
The cruise control pad is located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
How well your cruise control will work on
hills depends upon your speed, load and
the steepness of the hills. When going up
steep hills, you may have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to
brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your
speed down. Of course, applying the brake
pedal takes you out of cruise control. Many
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to a
higher speed. Press the SET button,
then release the button and the acceler-
ator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed.
• Press the RESUME button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want,
and then release the button. To increase
your speed in very small amounts, tap
1) Press the ON/OFF button to turn cruise
control on.
2) Accelerate to the speed you want.
3) Press the SET button and release it. An
indicator light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on to show you that
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
drivers find this to be too much trouble and
do not use cruise control on steep hills.
OFF (Off):
Exterior Lamps
Turn the band to this position to turn all
lamps off except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
The lever on the left side of the steering
column operates the exterior lamps.
Disengaging Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
Lamps On Reminder
You will hear a warning chime when the
• Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
depress the clutch pedal, if you have a
manual transmission.
exterior lamp band is in the
or
position and driver’s door is open.
• Press the ON/OFF button on the cruise
control pad.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make
it easier for others to see the front of your
vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful
in many different driving conditions, but
they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the
ignition, your cruise control set speed
memory is erased.
N6U3004A
The DRL system will make your low-beam
headlamps come on in daylight when the
following conditions are met:
The exterior lamp band has three posi-
tions:
(Headlamps):
• The ignition is on, and
Turn the band to this position to turn on the
headlamps, together with the following:
• the exterior lamp band is in OFF or in the
parking lamp position, and
• the parking brake is released.
• Tail Lamps
• License Plate Lamp
• Instrument Panel Lights
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,
sidemarker lamps, parking lamps and
instrument panel lights will not be illumi-
nated unless you have turned the exterior
lamps control to the parking lamp position.
The headlamps will turn off automatically
when the ignition switch is turned to LOCK
or ACC.
An indicator light on the secondary infor-
mation center will come on when the DRL
system is on. See “Daytime Running
Lamps Indicator Light” in this section.
(Parking Lamps):
Turn the band to this position to turn on the
parking lamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The DRL system will turn off under the fol-
lowing conditions:
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
This feature controls the brightness of the
instrument panel lights.
• The ignition is off, or
• the parking brakes are on, or
• the high-beam headlamps are on, or
• the low-beam headlamps are on, or
• flash-to-pass is used.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need
it.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has this feature, use your
fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or
misty conditions.
An indicator light on the secondary infor-
mation center will come on when the fog
lamps are on. See “Fog Lamp Light” in this
section.
The control for your front fog lamps is
located on the middle of the turn signal/
lamps, turn the fog lamp band to ON. To
turn off the front fog lamps, turn the fog
lamp band to OFF.
When using fog lamps, the ignition must be
on as well as the parking lamps or low-
beam headlamps.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located
on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
The fog lamps will turn off whenever the
high-beam headlamps are turned on.
When the high beams are turned off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Turn the thumbwheel up to brighten the
instrument panel lights or down to dim
them.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
Dome Lamp
Accessory Power Outlet
With the accessory power outlet you can
plug in auxiliary electrical equipment such
as a cellular phone or CB radio.
When using the accessory power
outlet, the maximum electrical load
must not exceed 12V-10A. Be sure to
turn off any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended periods
can drain the battery.
The accessory power outlet is located on
the front side of the center console below
the front ashtray.
The switch on this lamp has three posi-
tions.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet
and could result in blown vehicle or
adapter fuses. If you experience a prob-
lem, see your SUZUKI dealer for additional
information on the accessory power outlet.
ON:
The light comes on and stays on regard-
less of whether a door is open or closed.
• (Door):
The light comes on when a door is opened.
After all doors are closed, the light stays on
for about 7 seconds, and then fades out.
CAUTION
Adding some electrical equipment to
your vehicle can damage it or keep
other things from working as they
should. This wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Check with your
SUZUKI dealer before adding electri-
cal equipment, and never use any-
thing that exceeds the amperage
rating.
OFF:
N5U3006AS
The light remains off even when a door is
opened.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When
not in use, always cover the outlet with the
protective cap. The accessory power outlet
is operational when the ignition is in the
ACC or ON positions.
Map Lamps
When adding electrical equipment, be sure
to follow the proper installation instructions
included with the equipment.
Your vehicle has map lamps. To turn a
lamp on, press the button next to it. Press
the button again to turn it off.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Power outlets are designed for acces-
sory plugs only. Do not hang any
type of accessory or accessory
bracket from the plug. Improper use
of the power outlet can cause dam-
age not covered by your warranty.
The cigarette lighter is located to the right
of the front ashtray.
The front ashtray is located at the lower
part of the center of the instrument panel.
To remove the front ashtray for cleaning,
open the ashtray fully, lift the inner case up
and then pull it out.
To use it, turn the ignition to ACC or ON,
push the cigarette lighter in all the way and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out
by itself.
The rear ashtray is located at the bottom of
the rear center console. Pull the ashtray
toward the rear of the vehicle to open it. To
remove the rear ashtray, press in the
retaining spring and pull the bin out.
CAUTION
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with
your hand while it is heating. If you
do, it won’t be able to back away from
the heating element when it’s ready.
That can make it overheat, damaging
the lighter and the heating element.
WARNING
Don’t put papers or other flammable
items into your ashtrays. Hot ciga-
rettes or other smoking materials
could ignite them, causing a damag-
ing fire.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clock
Climate Controls
For example, if this button is pressed while
the time is between 8:00 and 8:29, the dis-
play is set to 8:00. If this button is pressed
while the time is between 8:30 and 8:59,
the display is set to 9:00.
The time is displayed in the digital clock
when the ignition is on. The clock is
located in the center of the instrument
panel. There are three adjusting buttons
for the digital clock:
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heat-
ing, cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.
After disconnecting the battery or after
replacing the fuse, reset the clock.
N4U3021A
Fan Control
H (Hour):
You can control the rate of airflow coming
from the system by turning the fan control
knob.
To go forward one hour, press the “H” but-
ton once, with the ignition on. To go for-
ward more than one hour, press and hold
the button until the correct hour is reached.
M (Minute):
To go forward one minute, press the “M”
button once, with the ignition on. To go for-
ward more than one minute, press and
hold the button until the correct minute is
reached.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. In any setting other than off, the fan
will run continuously with the ignition on.
S (Set):
To reset the time to the nearest hour, press
the “S” button.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The fan must be turned on to run the air
conditioning compressor.
(Front):
(Bi-Level):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
This mode directs approximately half of the
air to the instrument panel outlets, and
then directs the remaining air to the floor
outlets.
Temperature Control
You can control the temperature of the air
that comes through the air vents by turning
the temperature control knob.
N4U3023A
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to manually increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle. Turn the
the red area to get warm air.
Air Distribution
To change the current mode, select one of
the following from the air distribution mode
knob.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(Floor):
Recirculation
Air Conditioning
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Some of the air will also be
directed to the windshield, instrument
panel side outlets, and rear outlets. Be
sure to keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow the flow of air to the rear
compartment.
N4U3028A
N4U3029A
Press this button when driving in dusty
conditions or to avoid traffic or outside
fumes, and when quick cooling or heating
of the passenger area is required. The
indicator light will illuminate and interior air
will be recirculated.
If your vehicle has air conditioning, follow
these steps to use the system. Start the
engine and set the fan control knob to the
desired speed. The air conditioning com-
pressor does not operate when the fan
control knob is in the off position. Press the
air conditioning button to turn the air condi-
tioning system on. When this button is
pressed, the indicator light on the button
will come on to let you know the air condi-
tioning is activated.
N4U3027A
Pressing the recirculation mode button
again will draw outside air into the passen-
ger compartment. The indicator will go out.
Your windows may fog if you use the recir-
culation mode for extended periods. If this
happens, select the defrost mode.
To turn off the air conditioning, press the
button again. The indicator button will then
turn off to let you know that the air condi-
tioning is deactivated.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot
inside air escape; then close them. This
helps to reduce the time it takes for your
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle to cool down. It also helps the sys-
tem to operate more efficiently.
Defogging and Defrosting
(Defog):
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on
the cool window glass. This can be mini-
mized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog
or frost from your windshield and side win-
dows. Use the defog mode to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield
more quickly. For best results, clear all
snow and ice from the windshield before
defrosting. Turn the air distribution knob to
select the defog or defrost mode.
This mode directs air to the windshield,
side window outlets and floor outlets.
When you select this mode, the system
runs the air-conditioning compressor. To
defog the windows faster, turn the temper-
ature control knob clockwise to the warm-
est setting.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the
following:
1) Press the recirculation button.
2) Press the A/C button.
3) Select the coolest temperature on the
temperature control knob.
4) Select the highest fan speed on the fan
control knob.
Using these settings together for long peri-
ods of time may cause the air inside of
your vehicle to become too dry. To prevent
this from happening, after the air in your
vehicle has cooled, turn off the recircula-
tion mode by pressing the button again.
The air-conditioning system removes mois-
ture from the air, so you may sometimes
notice a small amount of water dripping
underneath your vehicle while idling or
after turning off the engine. This is normal.
N4U3030B
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
(Defrost):
Rear Window and Outside Rearview
Mirror Defogger
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the
side window outlets. When you select this
mode, the system runs the air-conditioning
compressor. To defrost the windows faster,
turn the temperature control knob clock-
wise to the warmest setting.
Your vehicle may have a rear window and
outside mirror defogger.
Don’t use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do,
you could cut or damage the warm-
ing grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to
the defogger grid.
N4U3032A
The rear window defogger uses a warming
grid to remove fog or frost from the rear
window. This feature will only work when
the ignition is in ON.
N4U3032B
(Rear):
Press the button to turn the rear window
and outside mirror defogger on or off. The
defogger will turn off approximately 10 min-
utes after the button is pressed. Be sure to
clear as much snow from the rear window
as possible. An indicator light on the button
will come on to let you know that the fea-
ture is activated.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Your vehicle may be equipped with a pas-
senger compartment air filter. It is located
on the passenger side under the glove box.
The filter traps most of the pollen from air
entering the module. Like your engine’s air
cleaner/filter, it may need to be changed
periodically.
N4U3033BS
To change the passenger compartment air
filter, use the following steps:
Use the lever located in the center of each
outlet to change the direction of the airflow.
Use the thumbwheel located next to the
outlets to turn them on and off.
Operation Tips
3) Remove the old passenger compart-
ment air filter.
4) Then reverse the steps to install the
new air filter.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from
the air inlets at the base of the vehicle
that may block the flow of air into your
vehicle.
Ensure that the new filter is inserted in
the proper orientation.
• Use of non-SUZUKI approved hood
deflectors may adversely affect the per-
formance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear
of objects to help circulate the air inside
of your vehicle more effectively.
1) Remove the four screws from the filter
cover located below the glove box.
2) Remove the filter cover.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION
get to know your warning lights and
gauges. They’re a big help.
Warning Lights, Gauges and
Indicators
Keep track of your odometer reading
and check the maintenance schedule
regularly for required services.
Increased wear or damage to certain
parts can result from failure to per-
form required services at the proper
mileage intervals.
This section describes the warning lights
and gauges that may be on your vehicle.
The pictures will help you locate them.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed
to let you know at a glance how your vehi-
cle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, how much fuel you’re using and
many other things you’ll need to drive
safely and economically.
Warning lights and gauges can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes seri-
ous enough to cause an expensive repair
or replacement. Paying attention to your
warning lights and gauges could also save
you or others from injury.
Your vehicle has this instrument panel
cluster, which includes indicator warning
lights and gauges that are explained on the
following pages.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can record the number
of kilometers or miles traveled for up to two
trips.
Warning lights come on when there may
be or is a problem with one of your vehi-
cle’s functions. As you will see in the
details on the next few pages, some warn-
ing lights come on briefly when you start
the engine just to let you know they’re
working. If you are familiar with this sec-
tion, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
The trip odometer button is located in the
lower right area of the speedometer.
Gauges can indicate when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s
functions. Often gauges and warning lights
work together to let you know when there’s
a problem with your vehicle.
There are two independent trip odometers,
which measure the distances your vehicle
has traveled since you last reset this func-
tion.
J7U3001B
When one of the warning lights comes on
and stays on when you are driving, or
when one of the gauges shows there may
be a problem, check the gauge that tells
you what to do about it. Please follow this
manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can
be costly – and even dangerous. So please
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilome-
ters per hour (km/h).
You can switch the trip odometer display
between Trip A and Trip B by pressing the
trip odometer button.
To reset each trip meter to zero, press and
hold the trip odometer button until it resets.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in miles.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tachometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminder Tone
When the key is turned to ON, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless
the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
If your vehicle has this feature, a tone
(instead of a chime) will sound for several
seconds when the ignition is ON to remind
people to fasten their safety belts. The tone
will not sound if the driver’s safety belt is
fastened.
WARNING
It is absolutely essential that the
driver and passengers wear their seat
belts at all times. Persons who are
not wearing seat belts have a much
greater risk of injury if an accident
occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-
ling your seat belt before putting the
key in the ignition.
The safety belt light will also come on and
stay on until the driver’s safety belt is buck-
led.
The tachometer shows your engine speed
in revolutions per minute (rpm).
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, nei-
ther the chime nor the light will come on.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer in the red area, or engine
damage may occur. The damage
would not be covered by your war-
ranty.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Charging System Light
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the
instrument panel. The air bag readiness
system checks the air bag’s electrical sys-
tem for malfunctions. The light tells you if
there is an electrical problem. The system
check includes the air bag sensor, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag Systems” in section 1.
WARNING
If the air bag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle, it means
the air bag system may not be work-
ing properly. The air bags in your
vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or
they could even inflate without a
crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the air bag readiness
light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The charging system light will come on
when you turn on the ignition, and the
engine is not running, as a check to show
you it is working.
When the engine is running, the light
should go out.
The air bag readiness light should be illu-
minated for a few seconds when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If the light doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are
driving, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. It could indicate
that you have a loose generator drive belt,
or another electrical problem. Have it
checked right away. Driving while this light
is on could drain your battery.
S4U3042A
This light will come on when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds.
Then the light should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after
you start the vehicle or comes on or
flashes when you are driving, the air bag
system may not work properly. Have your
vehicle serviced right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the
light on, be certain to turn off all your
accessories, such as the radio and air con-
ditioner.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is
divided into two parts. If one part isn’t
working, the other part can still work and
you will be able to stop the vehicle. For
good braking, though, you need both parts
working well.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occur, you should immediately ask
your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the
brake system.
• If the brake system warning light
does not go out after the engine
has been started and the parking
brake has been fully released.
• If the brake system warning light
does not come on when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
If the warning light comes on, there is a
brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
If your vehicle has an anti-lock brake sys-
tem, the ABS warning light comes on
briefly when you turn the ignition ON. This
indicates that the system is performing a
self-check and the indicator bulb is operat-
ing properly. The light should go out after
several seconds.
• If the brake system warning light
comes on at any time during vehi-
cle operation.
Contact your SUZUKI dealer for repairs if
the ABS warning light does any of the fol-
lowing:
If the light comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road and stop carefully. You
may notice that the pedal is harder to
push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for ser-
vice. See “Towing Your Vehicle” in section
4.
This light should come on briefly when you
turn the ignition key to ON. If it doesn’t
come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
• Does not come on when the ignition is
turned ON.
• Does not go out after several seconds.
• Comes on while driving.
When the ignition is on, the brake system
warning light will also come on when you
set your parking brake. The light will stay
on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If the lights stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
If the ABS warning light comes on while
driving, your vehicle may have an ABS
malfunction. Although your vehicle will
operate normally without ABS, have your
SUZUKI dealer check the system and
make any necessary repairs as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
comes on, remember that stopping
distance may be longer, you may
have to push harder on the pedal,
and the pedal may go down farther
than normal.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Sensitive Power Steering
(SSPS) Warning Light
Hold Mode Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
N5U3003A
If your vehicle has this feature, this light will
come on when the Hold mode is active.
If the HOLD mode light flashes, have your
vehicle checked.
If your vehicle has Speed Sensitive Power
Steering (SSPS), this warning light will
come on briefly when you turn the ignition
to ON as a check to show you the bulb is
working.
See “Hold Mode” under “Automatic Trans-
mission Operation” in section 2 for addi-
tional information on this feature.
Then it should go out after a few seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
coolant temperature gauge. With the igni-
tion in the ON position, this gauge shows
the engine coolant temperature.
If the warning light does not come on, have
it fixed so it will be able to warn you if there
is a problem.
If the gauge pointer moves into the red
area, your engine is too hot! It means that
your engine coolant has overheated.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on
while you are driving, the SSPS system
may not be working. If this happens, see
your SUZUKI dealer for service.
If you have been operating your vehicle
under normal driving conditions, you
should pull off the road, stop your vehicle
and turn off the engine as soon as possi-
ble.
See “Engine Overheating” in section 5.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
tem on your vehicle. Diagnosis and ser-
vice may be required.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
CAUTION
• Light On Steady
If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel econ-
omy may not be as good, and your
engine may not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
An emission control system malfunction
has been detected on your vehicle. Diag-
nosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle:
S5U3008AS
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
which monitors operation of the fuel, igni-
tion and emission control systems.
• Reducing vehicle speed.
• Avoiding hard accelerations.
• Avoiding steep uphill grades.
CAUTION
Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust or intake or
fuel system of your vehicle can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and
may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could
lead to costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. This may also result in
a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is
intended to assure that emissions are at
acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle,
The Check Engine Light comes on to indi-
cate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often will be indi-
cated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is
also designed to assist your service techni-
cian in correctly diagnosing any malfunc-
tion.
If the light stops flashing and remains on
steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” fol-
lowing.
If the light continues to flash, when it is
safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe
place to park your vehicle. Turn the key off,
wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following. If the
light is still flashing, see your SUZUKI
dealer for service as soon as possible. Fol-
low the driving guidelines described above.
When the ignition is on, this light should
come on and should go out after a few sec-
onds as a check to show you it is working.
If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired.
This light will also come on during a mal-
function in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing
A misfire condition has been detected. A
misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control sys-
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the Light Is On Steady
If you experience one or more of these
conditions, change the fuel brand you use.
It will require at least one full tank of the
proper fuel to turn the light off.
tems during normal driving. This may take
several days of routine driving. If you have
done this and your vehicle still does not
pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your SUZUKI dealer can pre-
pare the vehicle for inspection.
You also may be able to correct the emis-
sion system malfunction by considering the
following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If none of the above steps have made the
light turn off, your SUZUKI dealer can
check the vehicle. Your SUZUKI dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to
fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank”
in section 5. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off
or is improperly installed. A loose or miss-
ing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the
cap properly installed should turn the light
off.
Oil Pressure Light
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local govern-
ments have or may begin programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of
water?
If you have a low engine oil pressure prob-
lem, this light will stay on after you start
your engine, or come on when you are
driving. This indicates that your engine is
not receiving enough oil.
If so, your electrical system may be wet.
The condition will usually be corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few
driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to
help your vehicle pass an inspection:
The engine could be low on oil, or could
have some other oil problem. Have it fixed
immediately.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the Check Engine light is on or is not work-
ing properly.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with qual-
ity fuel. See “Gasoline Octane” in section
5. Poor fuel quality will cause your engine
not to run as efficiently as designed. You
may notice stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfir-
ing, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling
on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This
will be detected by the system and cause
the light to turn on.
The oil light could also come on in three
other situations:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system
determines that critical emission control
systems have not been completely diag-
nosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if you have recently replaced
your battery or if your battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control sys-
• When the ignition is on but the engine is
not running, the light will come on as a
check to show you it is working. The light
will go out after you start the engine. If it
doesn’t come on with the ignition on, you
may have a problem with the fuse or
bulb. Have it fixed right away.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If you’re idling at a stop sign, the light
may blink on and then off.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
• If you make a hard stop, the light may
come on for a moment. This is normal.
WARNING
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure
is low. If you do, your engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
You or others could be burned. Check
your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
If your vehicle has this feature, the fog
lamps indicator light will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
This light comes on whenever the high-
beam headlamps are on.
See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer”
under “Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever” in
this section for additional information.
The light will go out when the fog lamps
are turned off.
CAUTION
See “Fog Lamps” under Exterior Lamps in
this section for more information.
Operating your engine with the low
oil pressure light on can result in
covered by your warranty.
Fuel Gauge
Cruise Control Light
N5U3004A
If your vehicle has this feature, this light will
come on briefly when the ignition is turned
on.
The CRUISE light comes on whenever the
cruise control is set. See “Cruise Control”
in this section. The light will turn off when
the cruise control is turned off.
Your fuel gauge tells you approximately
how much fuel you have left, when the igni-
tion is on. When the indicator nears empty,
the low fuel warning light will come on. You
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
still have a little fuel left, but you should get
more soon. See “Low Fuel Warning Light”
in this section for more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator
Light
Here are four things that some owners ask
about. None of these show a problem with
your fuel gauge:
• At the service station, the gas pump
shuts off before the gauge reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up
than the gauge indicated. For example,
the gauge may have indicated the tank
was half full, but it actually took a little
more or less than half the tank’s capacity
to fill the tank.
• The indicator moves a little when you
turn a corner or speed up.
• The gauge goes back to empty when
you turn off the ignition.
S5U3002A
This light will come on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel.
This light will come on when the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) are on.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See
“Filling Your Tank” in section 5.
See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)”
under “Exterior Lamps” in this section for
further information on the DRL system.
Door Ajar Light
Passenger Air Bag Off Indicator
The passenger air bag off indicator
appears in the clock display located in the
center of the instrument panel.
For your fuel tank capacity, see “Capacities
and Specifications” in section 5.
S4U2029A
PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF
This light will stay on until all doors are
closed and completely latched.
If the key is in the ignition while the driver’s
door is open, you will also hear a warning
chime.
N5U1002AS
When the ignition key is turned to ON or
START, the passenger air bag off indicator
will light for several seconds as a system
check. Then, after several more seconds, if
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
remain lit, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right
Make sure that all doors are completely
closed and this light is out before driving.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
front passenger’s frontal air bag and side
air bag. See “Passenger Sensing System”
in Section 1 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light
WARNING
(Continued)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumi-
nation of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
WARNING
If the air bag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes
on and stays on, it means that some-
thing may be wrong with the air bag
system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because
an adult-size person sitting in the
right front passenger’s seat may not
have the protection of the frontal air
bag and side air bag. See “Air Bag
Readiness Light” in this section.
L5U3012A
The light comes on when the tire pressure
monitoring system detects that one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. This light will also come on for a
few seconds and then go off when you turn
the ignition to ON. This indicates that the
tire pressure monitoring system is func-
tioning properly.
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label and
this manual. (If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indi-
cated on the vehicle label or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
(Continued)
(Continued)
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
(Continued)
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
If the tire pressure warning light does
not come on when the ignition is
turned to the “ON” position, or
comes on and blinks for approxi-
mately one minute and then illumi-
nate continuously, while driving there
may be a problem with the tire pres-
sure monitoring system. Have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
dealer.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position, have the system
inspected by an authorized service
facility. If the warning light flashes
while driving, check to see whether
the warning light goes off after a few
minutes of driving.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indictor to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
WARNING
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on and stays on, reduce your
speed and avoid abrupt steering and
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon
as possible and check your tires.
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire. Refer to “Changing a
Flat Tire” in section 5.
• If one or more of your tires is
under-inflated, adjust the inflation
pressure in all of your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure as
soon as possible.
In this situation, please have the system
inspected by an authorized service facility.
If you replace one or more tires and the
TPMS warning light goes off during driv-
ing, there is no problem. However, if the
warning light does not go off, or if it flashes
again when the vehicle is driven, have the
vehicle inspected by an authorized service
facility.
Be aware that driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire can cause
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure, and may affect steering
control and brake effectiveness. This
could lead to an accident, resulting in
severe injury or death.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
See “Tire pressure Monitoring System” in
Section 5 for more information.
Cautions on Handling
Audio System
Precautions
• When the inside of the car is very cold
and the player is used soon after switch-
ing on the heater, moisture may form on
the disc or the optical parts of the player
and proper playback may not be possi-
ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it
off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on
the optical parts of the player, do not use
the player for about one hour, this will
allow the condensation to disappear nor-
mally.
(A)
52D274
This unit has been designed specifically for
playback of compact discs bearing the
mark (A).
No other discs can be played.
• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which
cause severe vibrations may cause
sound to skip.
Removing the disc
Proper way to hold
the compact disc
• This unit uses a precision mechanism.
Even in the event that trouble arises,
never open the case, disassemble the
unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.
Please bring the unit to an authorized
SUZUKI dealer.
52D275
To remove a compact disc from its storage
case, press down on the center of the case
and lift the disc out, holding it carefully by
the edges.
Always handle the compact disc by the
edges.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Never touch the surface.
52D348
52D350
52D347
Never stick labels on the surface of the
compact disc or mark the surface with a
pencil or pen.
Do not use compact discs that have large
scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.
Use of such discs will cause damage or
prevent the system from operating prop-
erly.
To remove fingermarks and dust, use a
soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from
the center of the compact disc to the cir-
cumference.
(B)
(B)
(C)
52D349
Do not use any solvents such as commer-
cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,
or thinner to clean compact discs.
52D351
Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-
light or any heat source.
NOTE:
• Do not use commercially available CD
protection sheets or discs equipped with
stabilizers, etc.
These may get caught in the internal
mechanism and damage the disc.
• CD-R discs may not be able to playback
in this unit due to the recording condi-
tions.
52D277
New discs may have some roughness
around the edges. The unit may not work
or the sound may skip if such discs are
used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to
remove the roughness (C) from edges of
the disc before insertion inside the unit.
• CD-RW discs can not playback in this
unit.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PLAYING THE RADIO
Radio with CD (Double Display, MP3/WMA) (AGC-6380)
Power/Volume knob (1):
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off.
2
3
9
Turn the Power/Volume knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume.
Press this button for a short time to MUTE
the radio. Press the button again to cancel
MUTE.
11
5
10
4
Finding a Station
AM button (2):
Press this button to switch to an AM sta-
tion. The display will show the selection.
12
1
6
8
FM button (3):
Press this button to switch to an FM sta-
tion. The display will show the selection.
TUNE button (4):
Press this button to select radio stations.
(Manual tuning)
7
Press the up arrows to increase the fre-
quency.
84Z022
Press the down arrows to decrease the fre-
quency.
The frequency of the AM band changes
10 kHz each time and the frequency of the
FM band changes 200 kHz each time.
1. Power/Volume knob
2. AM button
7. Preset station buttons
•2 RPT: Repeat button
•3 RDM: Random button
•4 INT: Introduction button
8. SOUND (SCROLL) button
9. CD/AUX button
10. EJECT button
11. DIR button
12. INFO/DISP button
3. FM button
4. TUNE button
5. SEEK button
6. SCAN/AST button
SEEK button (5):
Press this button to search for and select
receivable radio stations. (Seek tuning)
To search for the next receivable higher
station, press the up arrows.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
To search for the previous receivable lower
station, press the down arrows.
Preset station buttons (7):
SOUND button (8):
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)
SCAN/AST button (6):
Press this button to scan radio stations.
(Scan tuning)
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six
FM-A and six AM1, six AM2, six AM-A),
can be programmed on the six numbered
preset buttons, by performing the following
steps:
Press this button until “BAS” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The dis-
play will show the bass level. When fin-
ished making the selection, press this
button again to select the bass level.
Scan
The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, and then go on to the next sta-
tion. Press this button again to stop scan-
ning.
1) Turn the radio on.
2) Press the AM or FM button to select
FM1, FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2 or AM-A.
3) Tune in the desired station.
4) Press and hold one of the six numbered
preset buttons.
Press this button until “MID” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the mid. The dis-
play will show the mid level. When finished
making the selection, press this button
again to select the mid level.
The radio will only scan stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
The preset button number (Display:
CH#1 ~ CH#6) will flash on the display
when the station has been set. When-
ever that numbered preset button is
pressed, the memorized station will
return.
Automatic Store
Press and hold this button to use Auto
Store.
Press this button until “TRE” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the treble. The dis-
play will show the treble level. When fin-
ished making the selection, press this
button again to select the treble level. If a
station is weak or noisy, decrease the tre-
ble.
FM1’s 6 preset stations with the strongest
signal in the region can be automatically
stored. The display will show “AUTO
SCANNING”, and “SCANNING” will flash
on display.
5) Repeat the previous four steps for each
preset button.
ORDER OF SOUND FUNCTIONS
Stored stations will flash for a short time on
display in sequence. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM-A and
the first preset station will begin to play.
FM-A will appear on the display when lis-
tening to the automatically stored stations.
Press the AM or FM button to stop auto-
matic store.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press this button
until “BAL” appears on the display. Turn the
volume knob to change the balance. The
display will show the balance level. When
finished making the selection, press this
button again to select the balance level.
BASS
MID
TRE
VOL
FAD
EQ OFF
BAL
84Z023
To adjust the fade between the front and
rear speakers, press this button until “FAD”
appears on the display. Turn the volume
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
knob to change the fade between the front
and the rear speakers. The display will
show the fade level. When finished making
the selection, press this button again to
select the fade level.
PLAYING A CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a
known good CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull it in and the CD
should begin playing. You can insert a CD
with the ignition off.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is
recorded on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try labeling the
top of the recorded CD with a marking pen
instead.
Setting the EQ
When the CD is inserted, “CDP” will
appear on the display. As the CD is loading
“LOADING” will appear on the display. As
each new track starts to play, the track and
track number will appear on the display.
Press this button until “EQ OFF” appears
on the display to select customized equal-
ization settings designed for classic,
dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice and techno.
Turn the volume knob until the desired
equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press
the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a
CD in the player, it will stay in the player.
When a CD is in the player and the ignition
is turned on, the radio must be turned on
before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the
CD will start playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
RPT (Repeat) button (7):
Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off repeat
play.
To cancel an equalization setting, press
the SOUND button until “EQ OFF” appears
“OFF” appears on the display, then press
the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
RDM (Random) button (7):
Press this button to hear the tracks in ran-
dom, rather than sequential, order. “RDM”
will appear on the display. Press this button
again to turn off random play.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch
(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring.
Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are
loaded in the same manner.
INT (Scan) button (7):
Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each loaded CD.
“INTRO” will appear on the display. To stop
scanning, press this button again. The cur-
rent track will begin to play.
EQ OFF
TECHNO
CLASSIC
POP
DANCE
ROCK
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may
be reduced due to CD-R quality, the
method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. There may be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly.
VOICE
JAZZ
TUNE (Previous/Next Track) button (4):
Press the down arrows to go to the start of
the current track or press the up arrows to
go to the next track. The track number will
appear on the display. The player will con-
tinue moving backward or forward through
84Z024
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
the CD with each press of the up or down
arrows.
not eject when the ignition or the radio is
turned off.
the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If
a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files the
player will let you access and navigate up
to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum will be ignored.
AM button (2):
Using an MP3/WMA CD
Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future lis-
tening.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
Root Directory
FM button (3):
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are
recorded on a CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burn-
ing an MP3/WMA disc, using multiple
sessions. It is usually better to burn the
disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of
fixed or variable bit rates. Song title, art-
ist name, and album will be available for
display by the radio when recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/
WMA files on one disc.
The root directory will be treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory will be displayed
as “ROOT”. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed
prior to any other directory.
Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future lis-
tening.
CD/AUX button (9):
Press this button to play a CD when listen-
ing to the radio. “CDP” will appear on the
display when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol will appear on
the display when a CD is loaded.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists some-
where in the file structure that contains
only folders/subfolders and no compressed
files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file struc-
ture that contains compressed audio files
and the empty folder will not be displayed
or numbered.
Press this button while a CD is playing to
pause the CD. “PAUSE” will flash on the
display. Press this button again to resume
playing the CD.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a
“.mp3” or “.wma” extension, other file
extensions may not work.
The player will be able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 5 sessions, and
999 files. Long file names and folder
names may use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the
disc, minimize the length of the file, and
folder names. You can also play an MP3/
WMA CD that was recorded using no file
folders. The system can support up to 8
folders in depth, but, keep the depth of the
folders to a minimum in order to keep down
No Folder
Press this button to play a CD when listen-
ing to the audio contents from other device
(AUX mode). “CDP” will appear on the dis-
play when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol will appear on
the display when a CD is loaded.
When the CD contains only compressed
files, the files will be located under the root
folder. The next and previous folder func-
tions will have no function on a CD that
was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the
radio will display “ROOT”.
EJECT button (10):
Press this button to eject a CD. The only
way a CD can be ejected from the player is
by pressing the eject button. The CD will
When the CD contains only compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be
located under the root folder. When the
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio displays the name of the folder the
radio will display “ROOT”.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a
CD in the player, it will stay in the player.
When a CD is in the player and the ignition
is turned on, the radio must be turned on
before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the
CD will start playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
All of the CD functions work the same
while playing an MP3/WMA, except for
those listed here. See “Playing a CD” ear-
lier for more information.
Play will begin from the first track under the
root directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have been played, play will con-
tinue from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, the player will begin playing
again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
DIR (Directory) button (11):
Press this button to repeat the tracks in the
current directory. “DIR” will appear on the
display.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. “ALL” will appear on
the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch
(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring.
Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are
loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may
be reduced due to CD-R quality, the
method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. There may be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly.
File System and Naming
Press this button again to turn off repeat
play.
The song name in the ID3 tag will be dis-
played. If the song name is not present in
the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as
SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) button (5)
(in MP3/WMA mode):
Press the up or down arrows to change the
folder. If the CD-R doesn’t have any folder,
“ROOT” will flash on display for a short
time.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
4 pages will be shortened. The display will
not show parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename will
not be displayed.
TUNE (Previous/Next Folder) button (4):
Press the up or down arrows to go to the
first track in the previous or to go to the
next folder. The player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD with
each press of the up or down arrows.
If there is no apparent damage, try a
known good CD.
Playing an MP3/WMA
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway
into the slot, label side up. The player will
pull it in, then “LOADING”, and then “MP3”
or “WMA” will appear on the display. The
CD should begin playing. You can’t insert a
CD with the acc off. As each new track
starts to play, the track number, and the
song name will appear on the display.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is
recorded on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try labeling the
top of the recorded CD with a marking pen
instead.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display) button
(12):
Press this button to display additional text
information related to the current MP3/
WMA song. A choice of additional informa-
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
tion such as: Song Title, Album Title, Artist,
and Bit rate may appear.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD
player.
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
When information is not available, “No Info”
will appear on the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell
phone connectors. Plug the cell phone
connector into the auxiliary input jack to
hear the other side of a cell phone’s con-
versation through the vehicle sound sys-
tem.
Press and hold this button to change the
display mode.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your SUZUKI
dealer. If the radio displays an error mes-
sage, write it down and provide it to your
SUZUKI dealer when reporting the prob-
lem.
Scroll:
Press and hold the sound button [in MP3/
WMA mode]
The song title or other information of a
song will scroll on/off. The default mode is
scroll on.
Scroll mode can be changed only when
you press and hold the sound button.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their por-
table audio player while the vehicle is
parked. See Defensive Driving for more
information on driver distraction.
AUX Mode
Press this button to listen to the audio con-
tents from other devices; Walkman, Porta-
ble CD Player, Portable MP3 Player, i-pod,
XM receiver, etc.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is con-
nected, press the radio CD/AUX button as
needed to begin playing audio from the
device over the car speakers.
CD Messages
CHECK CD:
If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
1) Connect the output port of the device to
the aux jack of the head unit with an
aux connector.
2) Turn the device on.
3) Press this button.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) button (9):
• It is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD will play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the
CD will play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be com-
patible. See “MP3/WMA Format” earlier
in this section.
Press this button once to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press this
button a second time and the system will
begin playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. Once in this mode,
“Auxinput” will appear on the display. If the
auxiliary jack does not detect the presence
of an output jack, the aux mode will be pre-
vented from coming up.
If you want to control the volume level, use
the volume buttons of the head unit or the
device.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. This is not an audio output; do
not plug a headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. You can however, con-
nect an external audio device such as an
Power/Volume knob (1):
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to increase or decrease the volume of
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
the portable player. You may need to make
additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume does not go
loud or soft enough.
CDP MODE
Press the Seek Button for a short time to
go to the next track.
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE OPER-
ATION (if equipped in the vehicle)
Power Button
Press this button to turn the system on and
off. Press this button for a short time to
MUTE the sound. To cancel MUTE, press
this button again.
Track01
Track02
Volume Up Button
Press this button to increase the volume
level.
84Z026
Press and hold the Seek Button to fast
play.
Volume Down Button
Press this button to decrease the volume
level.
Mode Button
Press the Mode Button to change the
mode. (“CDP” is displayed when a CD is in
the CDP deck)
Seek Button
RADIO MODE
Press the Seek Button for a short time to
search for stored radio channels.
FM1
FM2
FM-A
CH1
CH2
CH3
(CDP)
AM-A
AM-2
AM-1
CH6
CH5
CH4
84Z027
84Z025
Press and hold the Seek Button to search
for the next receivable higher-frequency.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
PLAYING THE RADIO
Radio with Six-Disc CD (Double Display, MP3/WMA) (AGH-6400)
Power/Volume knob (1):
Press this knob to turn the system on and
off.
2
3
10
Turn the Power/Volume knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume.
Press this button for a short time to MUTE
the radio. Press the button again to cancel
MUTE.
9
5
11
4
Finding a Station
AM button (2):
Press this button to switch to an AM sta-
tion. The display will show the selection.
12
1
6
8
FM button (3):
Press this button to switch to an FM sta-
tion. The display will show the selection.
TUNE button (4):
Press this button to select radio stations.
(Manual tuning)
7
Press the up arrows to increase the fre-
quency.
85Z019
Press the down arrows to decrease the fre-
quency.
The frequency of the AM band changes
10 kHz each time and the frequency of the
FM band changes 200 kHz each time.
1. Power/Volume knob
2. AM button
•3 RDM: Random button
•4 INT: Introduction button
•5 DSC–: Previous CDC button
•6 DSC+: Next CDC button
8. SOUND (SCROLL) button
9. LOAD button
3. FM button
4. TUNE button
5. SEEK button
6. SCAN/AST button
7. Preset station buttons
•1 DIR: Directory button
•2 RPT: Repeat button
SEEK button (5):
10. CDC button
Press this button to search for and select
receivable radio stations. (Seek tuning)
To search for the next receivable higher
station, press the up arrows.
11. EJECT button
12. INFO/DISP button
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
To search for the previous receivable lower
station, press the down arrows.
Preset station buttons (7):
SOUND button (8):
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Mid/Treble)
SCAN/AST button (6):
Press this button to scan radio stations.
(Scan tuning)
Up to 36 stations (six FM1, six FM2, six
FM-A and six AM1, six AM2, six AM-A),
can be programmed on the six numbered
preset buttons, by performing the following
steps:
Press this button until “BAS” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the bass. The dis-
play will show the bass level. When fin-
ished making the selection, press this
button again to select the bass level.
Scan
The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, and then go on to the next sta-
tion. Press this button again to stop scan-
ning.
1) Turn the radio on.
2) Press the AM or FM button to select
FM1, FM2, FM-A, AM1, AM2 or AM-A.
3) Tune in the desired station.
4) Press and hold one of the six numbered
preset buttons.
Press this button until “MID” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the mid. The dis-
play will show the mid level. When finished
making the selection, press this button
again to select the mid level.
The radio will only scan stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
The preset button number (Display:
CH#1 ~ CH#6) will flash on the display
when the station has been set. When-
ever that numbered preset button is
pressed, the memorized station will
return.
Automatic Store
Press and hold this button to use Auto
Store.
Press this button until “TRE” appears on
the display. Turn the volume knob to
increase or to decrease the treble. The dis-
play will show the treble level. When fin-
ished making the selection, press this
button again to select the treble level. If a
station is weak or noisy, decrease the tre-
ble.
signal in the region can be automatically
stored. The display will show “AUTO
SCANNING”, and “SCANNING” will flash
on display.
5) Repeat the previous four steps for each
preset button.
ORDER OF SOUND FUNCTIONS
Stored stations will flash for a short time on
display in sequence. Once the stations are
stored, the radio will switch to FM-A and
the first preset station will begin to play.
FM-A will appear on the display when lis-
tening to the automatically stored stations.
Press the AM or FM button to stop auto-
matic store.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press this button
until “BAL” appears on the display. Turn the
volume knob to change the balance. The
display will show the balance level. When
finished making the selection, press this
button again to select the balance level.
BASS
MID
TRE
VOL
FAD
EQ OFF
BAL
84Z023
To adjust the fade between the front and
rear speakers, press this button until “FAD”
appears on the display. Turn the volume
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
knob to change the fade between the front
and the rear speakers. The display will
show the fade level. When finished making
the selection, press this button again to
select the fade level.
PLAYING A CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a
known good CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull it in and the CD
should begin playing. You can insert a CD
with the ignition off.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is
recorded on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try labeling the
top of the recorded CD with a marking pen
instead.
Setting the EQ
When the CD is inserted, “CDP” will
appear on the display. As the CD is loading
“LOADING” will appear on the display. As
each new track starts to play, the track and
track number will appear on the display.
Press this button until “EQ OFF” appears
on the display to select customized equal-
ization settings designed for classic,
dance, rock, jazz, pop, voice and techno.
Turn the volume knob until the desired
equalization setting appears on the display.
When finished making the selection, press
the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a
CD in the player, it will stay in the player.
When a CD is in the player and the ignition
is turned on, the radio must be turned on
before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the
CD will start playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
RPT (Repeat) button (7):
Press this button to repeat the current
track. RPT will appear on the display.
Press this button again to turn off repeat
play.
To cancel an equalization setting, press
the SOUND button until “EQ OFF” appears
on the display, turn the volume knob until
“OFF” appears on the display, then press
the SOUND button again to select the
equalization setting.
RDM (Random) button (7):
Press this button to hear the tracks in ran-
dom, rather than sequential, order. “RDM”
will appear on the display. Press this button
again to turn off random play.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch
(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring.
Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are
loaded in the same manner.
INT (Scan) button (7):
Press this button to listen to the first few
seconds of each track on each loaded CD.
“INTRO” will appear on the display. To stop
scanning, press this button again. The cur-
rent track will begin to play.
EQ OFF
TECHNO
CLASSIC
POP
DANCE
ROCK
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may
be reduced due to CD-R quality, the
method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. There may be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly.
VOICE
JAZZ
TUNE (Previous/Next Track) button (4):
Press the down arrows to go to the start of
the current track or press the up arrows to
go to the next track. The track number will
appear on the display. The player will con-
tinue moving backward or forward through
84Z024
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
the CD with each press of the up or down
arrows.
not eject when the ignition or the radio is
turned off.
the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback. If
a CD contains more than the maximum of
50 folders, 5 sessions, and 999 files the
player will let you access and navigate up
to the maximum, but all items over the
maximum will be ignored.
AM button (2):
Using an MP3/WMA CD
Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future lis-
tening.
MP3/WMA Format
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
Root Directory
FM button (3):
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are
recorded on a CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burn-
ing an MP3/WMA disc, using multiple
sessions. It is usually better to burn the
disc all at once.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of
fixed or variable bit rates. Song title, art-
ist name, and album will be available for
display by the radio when recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/
WMA files on one disc.
The root directory will be treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed
audio files, the directory will be displayed
as “ROOT”. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed
prior to any other directory.
Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future lis-
tening.
CD/AUX button (9):
Press this button to play a CD when listen-
ing to the radio. “CDP” will appear on the
display when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol will appear on
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists some-
where in the file structure that contains
only folders/subfolders and no compressed
files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file struc-
ture that contains compressed audio files
and the empty folder will not be displayed
or numbered.
Press this button while a CD is playing to
pause the CD. “PAUSE” will flash on the
display. Press this button again to resume
playing the CD.
• Make sure each MP3/WMA file has a
“.mp3” or “.wma” extension, other file
extensions may not work.
The player will be able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 5 sessions, and
999 files. Long file names and folder
names may use more disc memory space
than necessary. To conserve space on the
disc, minimize the length of the file, and
folder names. You can also play an MP3/
WMA CD that was recorded using no file
folders. The system can support up to 8
folders in depth, but, keep the depth of the
folders to a minimum in order to keep down
No Folder
Press this button to play a CD when listen-
ing to the audio contents from other device
(AUX mode). “CDP” will appear on the dis-
play when the CD player has been
selected. The CD symbol will appear on
the display when a CD is loaded.
When the CD contains only compressed
files, the files will be located under the root
folder. The next and previous folder func-
tions will have no function on a CD that
was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the
radio will display “ROOT”.
EJECT button (10):
Press this button to eject a CD. The only
way a CD can be ejected from the player is
by pressing the eject button. The CD will
When the CD contains only compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be
located under the root folder. When the
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
radio displays the name of the folder the
radio will display “ROOT”.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a
CD in the player, it will stay in the player.
When a CD is in the player and the ignition
is turned on, the radio must be turned on
before the CD will start playback. When
the ignition and radio are turned on, the
CD will start playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD
Messages” later in this section.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
All of the CD functions work the same
while playing an MP3/WMA, except for
those listed here. See “Playing a CD” ear-
lier for more information.
Play will begin from the first track under the
root directory. When all tracks from the root
directory have been played, play will con-
tinue from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, the player will begin playing
again at the first track of the first folder or
root directory.
DIR (Directory) button (11):
Press this button to repeat the tracks in the
current directory. “DIR” will appear on the
display.
Press this button again to repeat the tracks
in all of the directories. “ALL” will appear on
the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch
(8 cm) single CDs with an adapter ring.
Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs are
loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may
be reduced due to CD-R quality, the
method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R has been handled. There may be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface
of the CD is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly.
File System and Naming
Press this button again to turn off repeat
play.
The song name in the ID3 tag will be dis-
played. If the song name is not present in
the ID3 tag, then the radio will display the
file name without the extension (such as
MP3/WMA) instead.
SEEK (Previous/Next Folder) button (5)
(in MP3/WMA mode):
Press the up or down arrows to change the
folder. If the CD-R doesn’t have any folder,
“ROOT” will flash on display for a short
time.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
4 pages will be shortened. The display will
not show parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename will
not be displayed.
TUNE (Previous/Next Folder) button (4):
Press the up or down arrows to go to the
first track in the previous or to go to the
next folder. The player will continue moving
backward or forward through the CD with
each press of the up or down arrows.
If there is no apparent damage, try a
known good CD.
Playing an MP3/WMA
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway
into the slot, label side up. The player will
pull it in, then “LOADING”, and then “MP3”
or “WMA” will appear on the display. The
CD should begin playing. You can’t insert a
CD with the acc off. As each new track
starts to play, the track number, and the
song name will appear on the display.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is
recorded on a personal computer and a
description label is needed, try labeling the
top of the recorded CD with a marking pen
instead.
INFO/DISP (Information/Display) button
(12):
Press this button to display additional text
information related to the current MP3/
WMA song. A choice of additional informa-
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
tion such as: Song Title, Album Title, Artist,
and Bit rate may appear.
• There may have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD
player.
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD
changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
When information is not available, “No Info”
will appear on the display.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
The auxiliary input jack will also accept cell
phone connectors. Plug the cell phone
connector into the auxiliary input jack to
hear the other side of a cell phone’s con-
versation through the vehicle sound sys-
tem.
Press and hold this button to change the
display mode.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your SUZUKI
dealer. If the radio displays an error mes-
sage, write it down and provide it to your
SUZUKI dealer when reporting the prob-
lem.
Scroll:
Press and hold the sound button [in MP3/
WMA mode]
The song title or other information of a
song will scroll on/off. The default mode is
scroll on.
Scroll mode can be changed only when
you press and hold the sound button.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their por-
table audio player while the vehicle is
parked. See Defensive Driving for more
information on driver distraction.
AUX Mode
Press this button to listen to the audio con-
tents from other devices; Walkman, Porta-
ble CD Player, Portable MP3 Player, i-pod,
XM receiver, etc.
To use a portable audio player, connect a
3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack. When a device is con-
nected, press the radio CD/AUX button as
needed to begin playing audio from the
device over the car speakers.
CD Messages
CHECK CD:
If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for
one of the following reasons:
1) Connect the output port of the device to
the aux jack of the head unit with an
aux connector.
2) Turn the device on.
3) Press this button.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary) button (9):
• It is very hot. When the temperature
returns to normal, the CD will play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the
CD will play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• The format of the CD may not be com-
patible. See “MP3/WMA Format” earlier
in this section.
Press this button once to play a CD while a
portable audio device is playing. Press this
button a second time and the system will
begin playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. Once in this mode,
“Auxinput” will appear on the display. If the
auxiliary jack does not detect the presence
of an output jack, the aux mode will be pre-
vented from coming up.
If you want to control the volume level, use
the volume buttons of the head unit or the
device.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input
jack located on the lower right side of the
faceplate. This is not an audio output; do
not plug a headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. You can however, con-
nect an external audio device such as an
Power/Volume knob (1):
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock-
wise to increase or decrease the volume of
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
the portable player. You may need to make
additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume does not go
loud or soft enough.
CDP MODE
Press the Seek Button for a short time to
go to the next track.
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE OPER-
ATION (if equipped in the vehicle)
Power Button
Press this button to turn the system on and
off. Press this button for a short time to
MUTE the sound. To cancel MUTE, press
this button again.
Track01
Track02
Volume Up Button
Press this button to increase the volume
level.
84Z026
Press and hold the Seek Button for fast
play.
Volume Down Button
Press this button to decrease the volume
level.
Mode Button
Press the Mode Button to change the
mode. (“CDP” is displayed when a CD is in
the CDP deck)
Seek Button
RADIO MODE
Press the Seek Button for a short time to
search for stored radio channels.
FM1
FM2
FM-A
CH1
CH2
CH3
(CDP)
AM-A
AM-2
AM-1
CH6
CH5
CH4
84Z027
84Z025
Press and hold the Seek Button to search
for the next receivable higher-frequency.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD CHANGER OPERATION
(Optional)
The CD changer is installed in the trunk.
1
Up to 6 discs can be stored in the maga-
zine of the CD changer.
A selection of tracks from the 6 discs
stored in the disc magazine can be made
and automatically played in the order of
your preference.
NOTE:
• The CD changer is controlled by the
Main Unit.
• The CD changer is an Optional Item.
2
86Z026
1. Magazine slot
2. Magazine eject button
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
How to Change Discs
86Z014
86Z015
86Z013
2) Press the eject button on the CD
changer and remove the magazine.
3) Pull a tray out of the magazine by
pressing the tray button.
To remove:
1) Open the sliding door of the CD
changer to the right until it is completely
latched.
4) Remove the disc from the tray and rein-
sert the tray into the magazine.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The CD changer is operated by the main
unit.
button, the disc will skip to the next
track.
Labeled surface upward
2) To play the previous track, rotate this
knob counterclockwise for less than 1
second or press the track down button
once. Each time you rotate the knob or
press the button, the disc will skip to the
previous track.
1) Press the power button on the main unit
to turn the audio system on.
2) If a disc is already inserted inside the
CD changer, press the “CD” button.
Playback starts at the beginning of the
track that you were previously listening
to.
3) If a disc is not inserted yet, load a disc
in the magazine. (Refer to “How to
change discs”.)
Cue & Review:
This function allows desired point-search
within a track at a faster than normal play-
back speed.
Then, press the “CD” button to play.
Playback starts from the No. 1 disc.
1) To search for the desired point of a
track, rotate this knob and hold it or
press and hold the track up/down but-
ton. The audio level is reduced and the
disc will play at a faster than normal
playback speed. When the disc reaches
the desired point, release the knob/but-
ton and normal play will resume.
2) To cue (forward) the track, rotate this
knob clockwise or press the track up
button. To review (backward) the track,
rotate this knob counterclockwise or
press the track down button.
86Z016
To load:
CD Changer Play:
1) Put the disc on a tray with its label side
upward.
3) Push the magazine into the CD
changer until it is locked and a click
sound is heard.
To play the CD Changer while operating
the radio, press the “CD” button if a disc is
already inserted in the CD changer.
The mode is transferred to the CD changer
and the CD is played back from the track
that you were previously listening to.
4) After loading the magazine, close the
sliding door completely to the left.
If a disc is not in the CD changer, the mode
is not changed to the CD changer when
you press this button.
Repeat Play:
Track Up & Down:
To repeatedly listen to the current track,
press the “2/RPT” button.
The track up & down knob/button allows
you to make quick selections from your
playing disc.
“RPT” is displayed in VFD and the current
track will be played back repeatedly until
this function is canceled.
To cancel this function, press this button
again.
1) To play the next track, rotate this knob
clockwise for less than 1 second or
press the track up button once. Each
time you rotate the knob or press the
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Track Introduction:
To quickly and conveniently scan the track,
use the “3 or 4/INT” button.
“INTRO” will be displayed in VFD and the
audio system will play the first 10 seconds
of each track.
When the player reaches the desired track,
press this button again and normal play will
resume.
Random Play:
To play a CD disc in random order, press
the “4 or 5/RDM” button.
“RDM” will be displayed in VFD and the
audio system will play the CD in random
order.
To cancel this function, press this button
again.
Disc Up / Down Button
To select another disc in ascending order,
press the “3 or 6/UP” button. The number
of the selected disc will appear on the
VFD.
To select another disc in descending order,
press the “5 or 6/DN” button. The number
of the selected disc will appear on the
VFD.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MEMO
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving tech-
niques could save your life.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading
highway safety problem is for people never
to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if
people do? How much is “too much” if
someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on
each person and situation, here is some
general information on the problem.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about
driving is: Drive defensively.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking
and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the
number one contributor to the highway
death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Please start by using a very important
safety device in your vehicle: Your safety
belt. Buckle up. See “Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone” in section 1.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
Defensive driving really means “be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads or
freeways, it means “always expect the
unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that everyone
needs to drive a vehicle:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed
before and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the
drinker to consume the alcohol.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers
takes. Anticipate what they might do. Be
ready for their mistakes.
• Attentiveness.
According to the American Medical Associ-
ation, a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks
three 12 ounce (355 ml) bottles of beer in
an hour will end up with a BAC of about
0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120
ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors
like whiskey, gin or vodka.
Police records show that almost half of all
motor vehicle-related deaths involve alco-
hol. In most cases, these deaths are the
result of someone who was drinking and
driving. In recent years, more than 16,000
annual motor vehicle-related deaths have
been associated with the use of alcohol,
with more than 300,000 people injured.
Rear-end collisions are about the most
preventable of accidents. Yet they are com-
mon. Allow enough following distance. It’s
the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know
when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.
Many adults – by some estimates, nearly
half the adult population – choose never to
drink alcohol, so they never drive after
drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical, psycho-
logical and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything
that distracts from the driving task – such
as concentrating on a cellular telephone
call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor – makes proper defensive driving
more difficult and can even cause a colli-
sion, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
ple, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
There’s something else about drinking and
driving that many people don’t know. Medi-
cal research shows that alcohol in a per-
son’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spi-
nal cord or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking – driver or
passenger – is in a crash, that person’s
chance of being killed or permanently dis-
abled is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after
three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course,
as we’ve seen, it depends on how much
alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the
person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well
below a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research
shows that the driving skills of many peo-
ple are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at
BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with
a BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled
his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very dan-
gerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious – or
even fatal – collision if you drive after
drinking. Please don’t drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three
double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of
liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A per-
son who consumes food just before or dur-
ing drinking will have a somewhat lower
BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage
of body water than men. Since alcohol is
carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight
will when each has the same number of
drinks.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself
of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of
coffee or number of cold showers will
speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right
answer. What if there’s an emergency, a
need to take sudden action, as when a
child darts into the street? A person with
even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your
vehicle go where you want it to go. They
are the brakes, the steering and the accel-
erator. All three systems have to do their
work at the places where the tires meet the
road.
The law in an increasing number of U.S.
states, and throughout Canada, sets the
legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For exam-
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60
mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emer-
gency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
ABS is an advanced electronic braking
system that will help prevent a braking
skid.
When you start your engine and begin to
drive away, your anti-lock brake system will
check itself. You may hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is
going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves a little. This is nor-
mal.
And, of course, actual stopping distances
vary greatly with the surface of the road
(whether it’s pavement or gravel) the condi-
tion of the road (wet, dry, icy) tire tread the
condition of your brakes the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peo-
ple drive in spurts – heavy acceleration fol-
lowed by heavy braking – rather than
keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear
out much faster if you do a lot of heavy
braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you
will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer
brake life.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on
snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those
can provide. That means you can lose con-
trol of your vehicle.
If there’s a problem with the anti-lock brake
system, this warning light will stay on. See
“Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light” in
section 3.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time
and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the
brake pedal. That’s perception time. Then
you have to bring up your foot and do it.
That’s reaction time.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driv-
ing, brake normally but don’t pump your
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder
to push down. If your engine stops, you will
still have some power brake assist. But you
will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
(if equipped)
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a
second. But that’s only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with another.
Age, physical condition, alertness, coordi-
nation and eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into
a situation that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and
brake at the same time. However, if you
don’t have anti-lock, your first reaction – to
hit the brake pedal hard and hold it down –
may be the wrong thing to do. Your wheels
can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
can’t respond to your steering. Momentum
will carry it in whatever direction it was
headed when the wheels stopped rolling.
That could be off the road, into the very
thing you were trying to avoid, or into traf-
fic.
Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in
front of you. You slam on the brakes and
continue braking. Here’s what happens
with ABS:
As you brake, your computer keeps receiv-
ing updates on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maxi-
mum braking while maintaining steering
control. You can do this by pushing on the
brake pedal with steadily increasing pres-
sure. In an emergency, you will probably
want to squeeze the brakes hard without
locking the wheels. If you hear or feel the
wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If
you do have anti-lock, it’s different. See
“Anti-Lock Brake System” in this section.
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the
time you need to get your foot up to the
brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows
or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have anti-
lock brakes.
A computer senses that wheels are slow-
ing down. If one of the wheels is about to
stop rolling, the computer will separately
work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
The anti-lock system can change the brake
pressure faster than any driver could. The
computer is programmed to make the most
of available tire and road conditions. This
can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Using Anti-Lock
In many emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best braking.
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for
you. You may hear the anti-lock pump or
motor operate, and feel the brake pedal
pulsate, but this is normal.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Steering
When this warning light is on, your vehicle
will seem harder to steer than normal
when parking or driving slowly. You will still
have power steering, but steering will be
stiffer than normal at slow speeds. See
your SUZUKI dealer for service.
and braking – have to do their work where
the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the
hard braking can demand too much of
those places. You can lose control.
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system is not func-
tioning, you can steer but it will take much
more effort.
The same thing can happen if you’re steer-
ing through a sharp curve and you sud-
denly accelerate. Those two control
systems – steering and acceleration – can
overwhelm those places where the tires
meet the road and make you lose control.
Steering Tips
Speed Sensitive Power Steering
System
This system continuously adjusts the effort
you feel when steering at all vehicle
speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet
a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reason-
able speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here’s why:
What should you do if this ever happens?
Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal,
steer the vehicle the way you want it to go,
and slow down.
If your vehicle has this system, it varies the
amount of effort required to steer the vehi-
cle in relation to the speed of the vehicle.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us
is subject to the same laws of physics
when driving on curves. The traction of the
tires against the road surface makes it pos-
sible for the vehicle to change its path
when you turn the front wheels. If there’s
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle
going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll
understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that
you should adjust your speed. Of course,
the posted speeds are based on good
weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go
slower.
less at slower speeds to make the vehicle
more maneuverable and easier to park. At
faster speeds, the steering effort increases
to provide a sport-like feel to the steering.
This provides maximum control and stabil-
ity.
If you need to reduce your speed as you
approach a curve, do it before you enter
the curve, while your front wheels are
straight ahead.
The traction you can get in a curve
depends on the condition of your tires and
the road surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor
you can control.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable,
steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you
are out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
L5U3004A
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp
curve. Then you suddenly apply the
brakes. Both control systems – steering
This warning light will stay on, or come on
while you are driving, if there’s a problem
with the SSPS system.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be
more effective than braking. For example,
you come over a hill and find a truck
stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out
from between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. You can avoid these prob-
lems by braking – if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action – steer-
ing around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emer-
gencies like these. First apply your brakes
but, unless you have anti-lock, not enough
to lock your wheels.
An emergency like this requires close
attention and a quick decision. If you are
holding the steering wheel at the recom-
mended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly with-
out removing either hand. But you have to
act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly
below the pavement, recovery should be
fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and
then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn
your steering wheel to go straight down the
roadway.
See “Braking” in this section. It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on
the space available.
The fact that such emergency situations
are always possible is a good reason to
practice defensive driving at all times and
wear safety belts properly.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass
another on a two-lane highway waits for
just the right moment, accelerates, moves
around the vehicle ahead, then goes back
into the right lane again. A simple maneu-
ver?
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while you’re driving.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle
on a two-lane highway is a potentially dan-
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
gerous move, since the passing vehicle
occupies the same lane as oncoming traf-
fic for several seconds. A miscalculation,
an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to
frustration or anger can suddenly put the
passing driver face to face with the worst of
all traffic accidents – the head-on collision.
the right lane and don’t get too close.
Time your move so you will be increas-
ing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a “running start” that
more than makes up for the distance you
would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to can-
cel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a
slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take
care that someone isn’t trying to pass
you as you pull out to pass the slow vehi-
cle. Remember to glance over your
shoulder and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change
signal before moving out of the right lane
to pass. When you are far enough ahead
of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right
lane change signal and move back into
the right lane. (Remember that your right
outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem to be farther away
from you than it really is.)
• If you’re being passed, make it easy for
the following driver to get ahead of you.
Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about
what happens when the three control sys-
tems (brakes, steering and acceleration)
don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to
the sides and to crossroads for situa-
tions that might affect your passing pat-
terns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for
a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement mark-
ings and lines. If you can see a sign up
intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right
to pass (providing the road ahead is
clear). Never cross a solid line on your
side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you
want to pass while you’re awaiting an
opportunity. For one thing, following too
closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly
slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable
distance.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep try-
ing to steer and constantly seek an escape
route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the
vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids
by taking reasonable care suited to exist-
ing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always pos-
sible.
The three types of skids correspond to
your vehicle’s three control systems. In the
braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In
the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the
acceleration skid, too much throttle causes
the driving wheels to spin.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at
a time on two-lane roads. Reconsider
before passing the next vehicle.
• Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle
too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps
are not flashing, it may be slowing down
or starting to turn.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is
coming up, start to accelerate but stay in
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your
foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If
you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be
ready for a second skid if it occurs.
• If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
Driving at Night
No one can see as well at night as in the
daytime. But as we get older these differ-
ences increase. A 50-year-old driver may
require at least twice as much light to see
the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Of course, traction is reduced when water,
snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the
road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down
and adjust your driving to these conditions.
It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be
longer and vehicle control more limited.
What you do in the daytime can also affect
your night vision. For example, if you
spend the day in bright sunshine you are
wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. But if
you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at
night. They may cut down on glare from
headlamps, but they also make a lot of
things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by
approaching headlamps. It can take a sec-
ond or two, or even several seconds, for
your eyes to readjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who doesn’t lower the high beams,
or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps),
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly
into the approaching headlamps.
While driving on a surface with reduced
traction, try your best to avoid sudden
steering, acceleration or braking (including
engine braking by shifting to a lower gear).
Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is
slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues – such
as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” –
and slow down when you have any doubt.
Night driving is more dangerous than day
driving. One reason is that some drivers
are likely to be impaired – by alcohol or
drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Don’t drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to
reduce the glare from headlamps behind
you.
If you have the anti-lock braking system,
remember: It helps avoid only the braking
skid. If you do not have anti-lock, then in a
braking skid (where the wheels are no
longer rolling), release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling
again. This restores steering control. Push
the brake pedal down steadily when you
have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering
control.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on
your vehicle clean – inside and out. Glare
at night is made much worse by dirt on the
glass. Even the inside of the glass can
build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass
makes lights dazzle and flash more than
clean glass would, making the pupils of
your eyes contract repeatedly.
• Since you can’t see as well, you may
need to slow down and keep more space
between you and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed
roads. Your headlamps can light up only
so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Remember that your headlamps light up
far less of a roadway when you are in a
turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that
way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so
should your eyes be examined regularly.
Some drivers suffer from night blindness –
the inability to see in dim light – and aren’t
even aware of it.
reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pave-
ment.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in
good shape, a heavy rain can make it
harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road
and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape and keep your
windshield washer tank filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking
or missing areas on the windshield, or
when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Driving too fast through large water pud-
dles or even going through some car
washes can cause problems, too. The
water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down
before you hit them.
WARNING
Wet brakes can cause accidents.
They won’t work as well in a quick
stop and may cause pulling to one
side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle
of water or a car wash, apply your
brake pedal lightly until your brakes
work normally.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trou-
ble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, acceler-
ate or turn as well because your tire-to-
road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread
left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always
wise to go slower and be cautious if rain
starts to fall while you are driving. The sur-
face may get wet suddenly when your
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
CAUTION
Allow yourself more clear room ahead,
and be prepared to have your view
restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See “Tires” in section 5.
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much
water can build up under your tires that
they can actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehi-
cle is hydroplaning, it has little or no con-
tact with the road.
If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can
come in through your engine’s air
intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the under-
body of your vehicle. If you can’t
avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very
slowly.
City Driving
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it
can if your tires do not have much tread or
if the pressure in one or more is low. It can
happen if a lot of water is standing on the
road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface,
there could be the possibility of hydroplan-
ing.
Driving Trough Flowing Water
WARNING
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher
speeds. There just isn’t a hard and fast rule
about hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when it is raining.
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. If you try to drive
through flowing water, as you might
at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six
inches of flowing water can carry
away a smaller vehicle. If this hap-
pens, you and other vehicle occu-
pants could drown. Don’t ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
One of the biggest problems with city
streets is the amount of traffic on them.
You’ll want to watch out for what the other
drivers are doing and pay attention to traf-
fic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in
city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you
are going. Get a city map and plan your
trip into an unknown part of the city just
as you would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and
crisscross most large cities. You’ll save
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
time and energy. See the next part,
“Freeway Driving.”
flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a
passing lane.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes
quite sharply. The exit speed is usually
posted. Reduce your speed according to
your speedometer, not to your sense of
motion. After driving for any distance at
higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light
turns green, and just before you start to
move, check both ways for vehicles that
have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp
that leads to the freeway. If you have a
clear view of the freeway as you drive
along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you
expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge
into the gap at close to the prevailing
speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder
as often as necessary. Try to blend
smoothly with the traffic flow.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well
rested. If you must start when you’re not
fresh – such as after a day’s work – don’t
plan to make too many miles that first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Freeway Driving
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your
speed to the posted limit or to the prevail-
ing rate if it’s slower. Stay in the right lane
unless you want to pass.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you
keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs service, have it done
before starting out. Of course, you’ll find
experienced and able service experts in
SUZUKI dealerships all across North
America. They’ll be ready and willing to
help if you need it.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance
quickly over your shoulder to make sure
there isn’t another vehicle in your “blind”
spot.
Here are some things you can check
before a trip:
Once you are moving on the freeway,
make certain you allow a reasonable fol-
lowing distance.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thru-
ways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or
superhighways) are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reser-
voir full? Are all windows clean inside
and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
The most important advice on freeway
driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to
the right. Drive at the same speed most of
the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic
When you want to leave the freeway, move
to the proper lane well in advance. If you
miss your exit, do not, under any circum-
stances, stop and back up. Drive on to the
next exit.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the
lenses clean?
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
• Tires: They are vitally important to a
safe, trouble-free trip. Is the tread good
enough for long-distance driving? Are
the tires all inflated to the recommended
pressure?
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a
rest, service or parking area and take a
nap, get some exercise, or both. For
safety, treat drowsiness on the highway
as an emergency.
Shift to a lower gear when you go down
a steep or long hill.
WARNING
If you don’t shift down, your brakes
could get so hot that they wouldn’t
work well. You would then have poor
braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a
major storm system?
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “high-
way hypnosis”? Or is it just plain falling
asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hyp-
nosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
WARNING
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or
with the ignition off is dangerous.
Your brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing you down. They
could get so hot that they wouldn’t
work well. You would then have poor
braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have
your engine running and your vehicle
in gear when you go downhill.
There is something about an easy stretch
of road with the same scenery, along with
the hum of the tires on the road, the drone
of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you
sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than
a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is differ-
ent from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if
you’re planning to visit there, here are
some tips that can make your trips safer
and more enjoyable.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to
shift down to a lower gear. The lower
gears help cool your engine and trans-
mission, and you can climb the hill bet-
ter.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on
two-lane roads in hills or mountains.
Don’t swing wide or cut across the cen-
ter of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system and transmission. These
parts can work hard on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most
important thing to know is this: let your
engine do some of the slowing down.
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road
ahead and to the sides. Check your rear-
view mirrors and your instruments fre-
quently.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.
There could be something in your lane,
like a stalled car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on moun-
tains that warn of special problems.
Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or
broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid,
a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small
shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a cou-
ple of reflective warning triangles. And, if
you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old
carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard
to drive on. But wet ice can be even more
trouble because it may offer the least trac-
tion of all. You can get wet ice when it’s
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing
rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until salt and sand crews can get
there.
Whatever the condition – smooth ice,
packed, blowing or loose snow – drive with
caution.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Here are some tips for winter driving:
Most of the time, those places where your
tires meet the road probably have good
traction.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the frag-
ile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the
drive wheels will spin and polish the sur-
face under the tires even more.
• Have your vehicle in good shape for win-
ter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your trunk.
However, if there is snow or ice between
your tires and the road, you can have a
very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot
less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.
Unless you have an anti-lock braking sys-
tem, you’ll want to brake very gently, too. (If
you do have anti-lock, see “Braking” in this
section. This system improves your vehi-
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
cle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road.) Whether you have an
anti-lock braking system or not, you’ll want
to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up
on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal
down steadily to get the most traction you
can.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if
you brake so hard that your wheels stop
rolling, you’ll just slide. Brake so your
wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but
be careful.
• Whatever your braking system, allow
greater following distance on any slip-
pery road.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you
could be in a serious situation. You should
probably stay with your vehicle unless you
know for sure that you are near help and
you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and
keep yourself and your passengers safe:
WARNING
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might
be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered
with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice
patches may appear in shaded areas
where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or
under bridges. Sometimes the surface of
a curve or an overpass may remain icy
when the surrounding roads are clear. If
you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to
brake while you’re actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under
your vehicle. This can cause deadly
CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get
inside. CO could overcome you and
kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your vehi-
cle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe.
And check around again from time to
time to be sure snow doesn’t collect
there.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert
police that you’ve been stopped by the
snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you have no blankets or
extra clothing, make body insulators
from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats – anything you can wrap
around yourself or tuck under your cloth-
ing to keep warm.
Open a window just a little on the
side of the vehicle that’s away from
the wind. This will help keep CO out.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Run your engine only as long as you must.
This saves fuel. When you run the engine,
make it go a little faster than just idle. That
is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses
less fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle,
and possibly for signaling later on with your
headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and
right. That will clear the area around your
front wheels. Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear (or with a manual transmission,
between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and
REVERSE (R)), spinning the wheels as lit-
tle as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmis-
sion is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse direc-
tions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get
you out after a few tries, you may need to
be towed out. If you do need to be towed
out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the fol-
lowing section.
WARNING
If you let your tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could
cause an engine compartment fire or
other damage. When you’re stuck,
spin the wheels as little as possible.
Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedom-
eter.
Then, shut the engine off and close the
window almost all the way to preserve the
heat. Start the engine again and repeat
this only when you feel really uncomfort-
able from the cold. But do it as little as pos-
sible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the
vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exer-
comes.
CAUTION
Spinning your wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the
tires. If you spin the wheels too fast
while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your trans-
mission. See “Rocking Your Vehicle
To Get It Out.”
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is
stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but
you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast.
The method known as “rocking” can help
you get out when you’re stuck, but you
must use caution.
For information about using tire chains on
your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in section 5.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
Dolly Towing
Towing
Here are some important things to con-
sider before you do recreational vehicle
towing:
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your SUZUKI dealer or a profes-
sional towing service if you need to have
your disabled vehicle towed.
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehi-
cle manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles
have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equip-
ment? See your SUZUKI dealer or traile-
ring professional for additional advice
and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just
as you would prepare your vehicle for a
long trip, you’ll want to make sure your
vehicle is prepared to be towed. See
“Before Leaving on a Long Trip” in this
section.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle for recreational purposes
(such as behind a motorhome), see the fol-
lowing section, “Recreational Vehicle Tow-
ing”.
WARNING
Always use a safety chain when tow-
ing your vehicle and be sure to
observe federal, state, and local
requirement for trailer hitches, tow
bars, lights, etc.
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear
with the front wheels on the road.
This could cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Dinghy Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing
your vehicle behind another vehicle – such
as behind a motorhome. The two most
common types of recreational vehicle tow-
ing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing
your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground) and “dolly towing” (towing your
vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a
“dolly”).
CAUTION
Your vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To
tow your vehicle using a dolly, follow these
steps:
Towing your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground will damage
drivetrain components. The repairs
would not be covered by your war-
ranty.
1) Put the front wheels on the dolly.
2) Put the vehicle in PARK(P) for auto-
matic transaxle and NEUTRAL (N) for
manual transaxle.
3) Set the parking brake and then remove
the ignition key.
4) For a vehicle with an automatic tran-
saxle, remove the hole cover from the
shift lock release slot, insert the key,
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed
with all four wheels on the ground. If your
vehicle must be towed, you should use a
dolly. See “Dolly Towing” that follows for
more information.
With the proper preparation and equip-
ment, many vehicles can be towed in these
ways. See the following sections, “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
and shift to NEUTRAL (N). See “Shift-
ing Out of Park (P)” in Section 2.
5) Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-
ahead position with a clamping device
designed for towing.
Tire and Loading Information Label
safely carry. Cargo load capacity is the dif-
ference between the total load capacity of
the vehicle and the total combined weight
of all vehicle occupants. Refer to “Steps for
Determining Correct Load Limit” for details
on how to determine cargo load capacity.
6) Release the parking brake.
The combined weight of occupants and carge should never exceed Kg or
lbs
GVWR – Maximum permissible overall
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including
all the occupants, accessories and cargo
plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a
trailer).
Loading Your Vehicle
TIRE SIZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE
It is very important to know how much
weight your vehicle can carry. The load
capacities of your vehicle are indicated by
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR,
front and rear), the total load capacity, the
seating capacity, and the cargo load
capacity. The GVWR and GAWR (front and
rear) are listed on the Safety Certification
side door latch striker. The total load
capacity and seating capacity are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label
which is located on the center pillar, near
the driver’s door latch.
FRONT
REAR
SPARE
GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-
missible weight on an individual axle.
J7U4001A
Seating Capacity – Maximum number of
occupants the vehicle is designed to carry.
Certification Label
NOTE:
Even though the number of occupants is
within the seating capacity, you still must
make sure that you do not exceed the total
load capacity of the vehicle.
The Tire and Loading Information label
also gives you the size and recommended
inflation pressure for the factory installed,
original equipment tires on your vehicle.
For more information on tires and inflation,
see “Tires” in section 5.
Total Load Capacity – Maximum permissi-
ble weight a vehicle can carry including the
weight of all the occupants, accessories
and cargo.
The weight of any accessories already
installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-
chase, or that you or the dealer install after
purchase, must be subtracted from the
total load capacity to determine how much
capacity remains available for occupants
and cargo. Contact your SUZUKI dealer for
further information.
The cargo load capacity can be deter-
mined as described below.
Cargo Load Capacity – Maximum weight
of cargo and luggage that the vehicle can
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
5) Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and
actual loads at the front and rear axles can
only be determined by weighing the vehicle
using a vehicle scale. To measure the
weight and load, try taking your vehicle to
a highway weighing station, shipping com-
pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.
Compare these weights to the GVWR and
GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety
Certification Label. If the gross vehicle
weight or the load on either axle exceeds
these ratings, you must remove enough
weight to bring the load down to the rated
capacity.
Never overload your vehicle. Over-
loading your vehicle can cause dam-
age to your tires and lead to poor
steering and braking which can result
in an accident. The gross vehicle
weight (sum of the weights of the
loaded vehicle, driver and passen-
gers) must never exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed
on the Safety Certification Label. In
addition, never distribute a load so
that the weight on either the front or
rear axle exceeds the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the
Safety Certification Label.
Vehicle Loading Example
As an example, suppose that the Tire and
Loading Information label on your vehicle
indicates that your vehicle’s total load
capacity is 950 lbs. If you were to drive
your vehicle with one passenger, and the
total combined weight of you and your pas-
senger was 350 lbs, then the cargo and
luggage capacity of your vehicle would be
600 lbs (950 – 350 = 600 lbs).
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX pounds” on your
vehicle placard.
2) Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
If you later added 2 more passengers, hav-
ing a combined weight of 325 lbs, the
cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle
would be reduced from 600 lbs to 275 lbs
(600 – 325 = 275 lbs). As you can see, as
the number and combined weight of vehi-
cle occupants increase, the vehicle’s cargo
and luggage capacity decreases.
If you put things inside your vehicle – like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else – they will go as fast as the vehicle
goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilo-
grams or XXX pounds.
4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amounts equals 1,400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400
– 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING
the tires when the vehicle is at its GVWR
or GAWR limit. Never use replacement
tires that have a load-carrying capacity
less than the original tires on your vehicle.
Tire load-carrying capacity information is
molded into the tire sidewall typically
shown as “Max. Load”. Use of replacement
tires with a lower load-carrying capacity
than the original tires, or failure to keep the
tires inflated to recommended tire pres-
sure, may reduce the GVWR or GAWR
limit of your vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Things you put inside your vehicle
can strike and injure people in a sud-
den stop or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk or rear area
of your vehicle. In a trunk, put them
as far forward as you can. Try to
spread the weight evenly. If you
have fold-down rear seats, you’ll
find four anchors on the back wall
of your trunk. You can use these
anchors to tie down lighter loads.
They’re not strong enough for
heavy things, however, so put them
as far forward as you can in the
trunk or rear area.
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
• Don’t leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Use of replacement tires with a higher
load-carrying capacity than the original
tires, or using a tire inflation pressure
higher than the recommended tire inflation
pressure, will not increase the GVWR or
GAWR limit of your vehicle.
L3U4030A
Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The
vehicle is not designed or intended for
such use. Towing a trailer can adversely
affect handling, durability and fuel econ-
omy.
• When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever you
can.
• Don’t leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Determining Compatibility of Tire and
Vehicle Load Limits
The tires on your vehicle, when they are
inflated to the recommended tire inflation
pressure, have a load-carrying capacity
that is greater than the load that will be on
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Service ................................................................................. 5-1
Fuel ....................................................................................... 5-1
Checking Things Under the Hood ..................................... 5-4
Headlamp Aiming ................................................................ 5-23
Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 5-23
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .............................. 5-27
Tires ...................................................................................... 5-28
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...................................... 5-32
Appearance Care ................................................................. 5-44
Vehicle Identification .......................................................... 5-48
Electrical System ................................................................ 5-48
Capacities and Specifications ........................................... 5-53
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Service
Fuel
WARNING
Your SUZUKI dealer knows your vehicle
best and wants you to be happy with it. We
hope you’ll go to your SUZUKI dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine
SUZUKI parts and SUZUKI trained and
supported service people.
Use of the recommended fuel is an impor-
tant part of the proper maintenance of your
vehicle.
You can be injured and your vehicle
could be damaged if you try to do
service work on a vehicle without
knowing enough about it.
Gasoline Octane
Use only unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. In an emer-
gency, you may be able to use a lower
octane rating – as low as 85 – if heavy
knocking does not occur. Refill your tank
with proper fuel as soon as possible. Oth-
erwise, you might damage your engine. If
you are using 87 or higher-octane rating
fuel and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowl-
edge, experience, the proper
replacement parts and tools before
you attempt any vehicle mainte-
nance task.
We hope you’ll want to keep your SUZUKI
vehicle all SUZUKI.
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work,
Vehicle” in section 1.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts,
bolts
and
other
fasteners.
“English” and “metric” fasteners
can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts
receipts and list the mileage and the date
of any service work you perform. See
“Maintenance Record” in section 6.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emission Standards (see the underhood
emission control label), it is designed to
operate on fuels that meet California spec-
ifications. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions stan-
dards, your vehicle will operate satisfacto-
rily on fuels meeting federal specifications,
but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on (see Malfunction Indica-
tor Lamp in section 3) and your vehicle
may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs,
return to your SUZUKI dealer for diagno-
sis.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This
may cause wind noise and affect wind-
shield washer performance. Check with
your SUZUKI dealer before adding equip-
ment to the outside of your vehicle.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT);
ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. SUZUKI
does not recommend the use of such gas-
olines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system may be
affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
SUZUKI dealer for service.
Additives
Filling Your Tank
WARNING
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain
additives that will help prevent engine and
fuel system deposits from forming, allow-
ing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add any-
thing to your fuel. However, some gaso-
lines contain only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency regulations.
SUZUKI recommends that you buy gaso-
lines that are advertised to help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean. If your
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries. To help
avoid injuries to you and others, read
and follow all the instructions on the
pump island. Turn off your engine
when you are refueling. Don’t smoke
if you’re near fuel or are refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames
and smoking materials away from
fuel. Don’t leave the fuel pump unat-
tended when refueling your vehicle –
this is against the law in some
places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump
fuel.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country
outside the United States or Canada, the
proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use
leaded gasoline or any other fuel not rec-
ommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper
fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gas-
olines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. SUZUKI recom-
mends that you use these gasolines.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto
club, or contact a major oil company that
does business in the country where you’ll
be driving.
CAUTION
Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Don’t
use fuel containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in your fuel sys-
tem and also damage the plastic and
rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated
for low emissions may contain an octane-
enhancing additive called methylcyclopen-
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
While refueling, hang the tethered cap
inside the fuel door.
WARNING
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise).
If a fire starts while you’re refueling,
don’t remove the nozzle. Shut off the
flow of fuel by shutting off the pump
or by notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
WARNING
If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Fuel can spray out on you if you open
the fuel cap too quickly. This spray
can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for
any “hiss” noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
CAUTION
If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get a genuine SUZUKI cap or its
equivalent. Your SUZUKI dealer can
get one for you. If you get the
improper type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may dam-
age your fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator
Lamp” in the Index.
To open the fuel filler door, pull up on the
fuel filler door release lever located on the
floor to the left of the driver’s seat.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Don’t top off or
overfill your tank, and wait a few seconds
after you’ve finished pumping before you
remove the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See “Clean-
ing the Outside of Your Vehicle” in this sec-
tion.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it
to the right (clockwise) until you hear a
clicking sound. Make sure you fully install
the cap. The diagnostic system can deter-
mine if the fuel cap has been left off or is
improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
“Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in section 3.
N4U5041A
The fuel cap is located on the passenger’s
side of your vehicle.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING
Hood Release
Checking Things Under the
Hood
To open the hood, do the following.
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in your vehicle. Static elec-
tricity discharge from the container
can ignite the gasoline vapor. You
can be badly burned and your vehicle
can be damaged if this occurs. To
help avoid injury to you and others:
WARNING
An electric fan under the hood can
start up and injure you even when the
engine is not running. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Dispense
gasoline only into
approved containers.
WARNING
• Do not fill a container while it is
inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s
trunk, pickup bed or on any surface
other than the ground.
Things that burn can get on hot
engine parts and start a fire. These
include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant,
brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You or others could be burned. Be
careful not to drop or spill things that
will burn onto a hot engine.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with
the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact
should be maintained until the fill-
ing is complete.
• Don’t smoke while pumping gaso-
line.
1) Pull the hood release handle located at
the lower left side of the instrument
panel.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
2) Then go to the front of the vehicle and
lift the bottom of the secondary hood
release lever upward. The secondary
hood release lever is located near the
front center of the hood.
3) Lift the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and place the hood
prop into the slot in the hood.
4) Before closing the hood, be sure all the
filler caps are on properly. Then lift the
hood to relieve pressure on the hood
prop. Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the hood and return the prop to
its retainer. Lower the hood 12 in (30
cm) above the vehicle and release it to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood
is closed and repeat the process if nec-
essary.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the engine, you’ll see the following:
A
B
C
D
E
I
H
G
F
N5U5007A
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
B. Engine Oil Filler Cap
C. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
E. Underhood Fuse Block
F. Batter y
G. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
H. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
I. Engine Oil Dipstick
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Engine Oil
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil pressure light appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to
check your engine oil level right away.
1.0 L
For more information, see “Oil Pressure
Light” in section 3.
L3U5011A
Use the engine oil dipstick to check the oil
level. The dipstick’s handle will be a yellow
ring. See “Engine Compartment Overview”
in this section for the location of the engine
oil dipstick.
You should check your engine oil level reg-
ularly; this is an added reminder.
If the oil is at or below the MIN mark, then
you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This sec-
tion explains what kind of oil to use. For
engine oil crankcase capacity, see “Capac-
ities and Specifications” in this section.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil
every time you get fuel. In order to get an
accurate reading, the oil must be warm
and the vehicle must be on level ground.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If
you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show
the actual level.
CAUTION
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets
above the upper mark that shows the
proper operating range, your engine
could be damaged.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a
paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all
the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip
down and check the level.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be
identified by looking for the starburst sym-
bol.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
LOOK FOR
THIS SYMBOL
This symbol indicates that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum Insti-
tute (API). Do not use any oil which does
not carry this starburst symbol.
HOT
WEATHER
SAE 10W-30 ACCEPTABLE
IF 5W-30 IS NOT AVAILABLE
This (A) is where you add oil. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” on a previous
page in this section for more information
on location.
SAE 5W-30
RECOMMENDED
If you choose to perform the engine oil
change service yourself, be sure the oil
you use has the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container. If you have your
oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into
your engine is American Petroleum Insti-
tute certified for gasoline engines.
COLD
WEATHER
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when
you’re through.
DO NOT USE SAE 10W-40, SAE 20W-50 OR ANY
OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
• SAE 5W-30
You should also use the proper viscosity oil
for your vehicle, as shown in the viscosity
chart.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE
5W-30 is the only viscosity grade recom-
mended for your vehicle. However, if it’s
going to be –4°F (–20°C) or above and
SAE 5W-30 is not available, you may use
SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show
its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oil such as SAE 10W-40
or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
your SUZUKI dealer, a service station or a
local recycling center for help.
Driving under these conditions causes
engine oil to break down sooner. If any one
of these is true for your vehicle, then you
need to change your oil and filter every
3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 3 months –
whichever occurs first.
Use only engine oil with the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
Failure to use the recommended oil
can result in engine damage not cov-
ered by your warranty.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If none of them is true, use the long trip/
highway maintenance schedule. Change
the oil and filter every 7,500 miles (12,000
km) or 6 months – whichever occurs first.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions will
cause engine oil to break down slower.
If you are in an area of extreme cold,
where the temperature falls below –22°F
(–30°C), it is recommended that you use
either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an
engine at extremely low temperatures.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements
that may be unhealthy for your skin and
could even cause cancer. Don’t let used oil
stay on your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dis-
pose of clothing or rags containing used
engine oil. See the manufacturer’s warn-
ings about the use and disposal of oil prod-
ucts.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recom-
mended oils with the starburst symbol are
all you will need for good performance and
engine protection.
The engine air cleaner/filter is located on
the passenger’s side of the engine com-
partment. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in this section for more informa-
tion on location.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use the
short trip/city maintenance schedule:
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 7,500
miles (12,000 km) or 6 months – whichever
occurs first.
Used oil can be a threat to the environ-
ment. If you change your own oil, be sure
to drain all the oil from the filter before dis-
posal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water.
Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of your used oil, ask
• Most trips are less than 5 miles (8 km).
This is particularly important when out-
side temperatures are below freezing.
• Most trips include extensive idling (such
as frequent driving in stop-and-go traf-
fic).
• The vehicle is used for delivery service,
police, taxi or other commercial applica-
tion.
Replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)
or 24 months – whichever comes first.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions,
inspect the filter every 3,750 miles (6,000
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
km) or 3 months. If necessary, clean or
replace it.
CAUTION
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire.
And, dirt can easily get into your
engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place
when you’re driving.
This work requires special skill and
equipment. Before attempting to do
the work, be sure you are fully
acquainted with doing this job.
Have your SUZUKI dealer do this
work if you are not confident you can
complete the task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured or
could damage the vehicle.
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the
filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the
filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the fil-
ter remains “caked” with dirt, a new filter is
required.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
To ensure proper functioning, efficiency,
and durability of the automatic transmis-
sion, be sure to keep the transmission fluid
at the proper level. Too much or too little
fluid can cause problems.
To inspect or replace the filter, do the fol-
lowing:
1) Start the engine.
1) Remove the four screws on the cover.
2) Lift off the cover.
2) Warm up the engine until the tempera-
ture of the automatic transmission fluid
reaches approximately 40°C (104°F).
3) Move the selector lever from “P” to “1”
and return to “P”. Wait for a few sec-
onds at each select position until the
selected gears are fully engaged.
3) Check or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter. See “Normal Mainte-
nance Replacement Parts” in this sec-
tion for replacement part numbers.
4) Reinstall the filter, put the cover back on
tightly, and tighten the screws.
The fluid level must be checked with the
engine running and the selector lever in P
(Park). The vehicle must be up to normal
operating temperature and parked on level
ground.
The normal operating temperature for the
fluid will be reached after driving about 10
minutes.
WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleans the air, it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it
isn’t there and the engine backfires,
you could be burned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Checking Automatic Transmission Fluid
Level
If the fluid is contaminated or discolored,
change the automatic transmission fluid.
A decrease in the fluid level indicates a
leak in the automatic transmission. If
noted, contact your SUZUKI dealer for
repair as soon as possible.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, the fluid and filter do not
require changing.
1) Turn the engine off.
2) Allow the transmission to cool. It must
be cool enough for you to rest your fin-
gers on the transmission case.
3) Remove filler plug.
CAUTION
4) Make sure the fluid reaches the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole.
Use of automatic transmission fluid
labeled other than ESSO LT 71141 or
TOTAL ATF H50235 may damage your
vehicle, and the damages may not be
covered by your warranty. Always
use ESSO LT 71141 or TOTAL ATF
H50235 labeled automatic transmis-
sion fluid.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubri-
cants” in section 6 for the proper fluid to
use.
4) Remove filler plug.
5) Make sure the fluid reaches the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole.
6) If the level is low, add fluid until it begins
to run out the filler hole.
Manual Transmission Fluid
7) After filling to the correct level, reinstall
the plug securely.
Checking Transmission Fluid Level
5) If the level is low, add fluid until it begins
to run out the filler hole.
6) After filling to the correct level, reinstall
the plug securely.
7) Visually check the transmission case
for leaks or damage.
WARNING
Recommend Automatic Transmission
Fluid and Maintenance Schedule
Change both the fluid and filter every
37,500 miles (60,000 km) if the vehicle is
mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
This work requires special skill and
equipment. Before attempting to do
the work, be sure you are fully
acquainted with doing this job.
Have your SUZUKI dealer do this
work if you are not confident you can
complete the task safely.
Otherwise, you could be injured or
could damage the vehicle.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubri-
cants” in section 6 for the proper fluid to
use.
• In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• For business uses such as taxi, police or
delivery service.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
the MIN and the MAX marks on the reser-
voir, the fluid level is correct. The reservoir
is located near the back of the engine com-
partment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
this section for more information on loca-
tion.
Hydraulic Clutch
There is one reservoir for both the brake
and the hydraulic clutch fluid. See “Brakes”
in this section for more information.
Do not mix Dex-cool and silicate
based coolant in your coolant sys-
tem.
The mixture can damage the cooling
system.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle
is self-adjusting. The master cylinder res-
ervoir is filled with hydraulic fluid.
Engine Coolant
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
Use a 60/40 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and engine coolant which won’t
damage aluminum parts. If another type of
coolant is used, aluminum parts might be
subject to corrosion.
The following explains your cooling system
and how to add coolant when it is low. If
you have a problem with engine overheat-
ing, see “Engine Overheating” in this sec-
tion.
When to Check and What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to
determine how often you should check the
fluid level and for the proper fluid. See sec-
tion 6.
You can also use a recycled coolant with a
complete coolant flush and refill. If you use
this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add
anything else.
What to Use
The cooling system in your vehicle is
designed to use either Dex-cool coolant,
which is red in color, or silicate based cool-
ant, which is blue. These two types of cool-
ant are not compatible with each other and
should never be mixed. Therefore, if the
original coolant in your vehicle’s cooling
system was red, then you should use only
Dex-cool coolant for the life of your vehicle.
If the original coolant in your vehicle's cool-
ing system was blue, then you should use
only silicate based coolant for the life of
your vehicle. Even if the cooling system
has been completely drained before a refill,
do not switch types of coolant.
How to Check and Add Fluid
A 60/40 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and proper coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to –33°F
(–36°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 268°F
(131°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine tempera-
ture.
• Let the warning lights and gauges work
as they should.
For protection in extremely cold weather
conditions, use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and proper coolant.
To check the fluid level, look on the side of
the reservoir. If the fluid level is between
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
Adding only plain water to your cool-
ing system can be dangerous. Plain
water, or some other liquid such as
alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you
wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 60/
and the proper coolant.
If you use the proper coolant, you
don’t have to add extra inhibitors or
additives which claim to improve the
system. These can be harmful.
Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap – even a little – when the engine
and radiator are hot.
Loosening the surge tank pressure
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot can allow steam and scalding liq-
uids to blow out and burn you badly.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface.
When your engine is cold, the coolant level
should be between MAX and MIN mark on
the coolant surge tank. The level rises at
engine operation temperature and drops
again when the engine cools down.
Adding Coolant
CAUTION
If the level falls below the MIN mark, add
the proper coolant mixture at the surge
tank, but only when the engine is cool. If
the surge tank is empty, a special fill proce-
dure is necessary. See “Cooling System”
in this section for instructions on “How to
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank”.
If you use an improper coolant mix-
ture, your engine could overheat and
be badly damaged. The repair cost
wouldn’t be covered by your war-
ranty. Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine, radi-
ator, heater core and other parts.
The engine coolant surge tank is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compart-
ment. See “Engine Compartment Over-
view” in this section for more information
on location.
WARNING
If you have to add coolant more than four
times a year, have your SUZUKI dealer
check your cooling system.
Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant con-
tains ethylene glycol, and it will burn
if the engine parts are hot enough.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
When replacing the pressure cap, make
sure it is hand-tight.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant,
your vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
CAUTION
Your coolant surge tank cap is a
pressure-type cap and must be
tightly installed to prevent coolant
loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. See “Capacities
and Specifications” for more informa-
tion.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but
see or hear no steam, the problem may not
be too serious. Sometimes the engine can
get a little too hot when you:
Engine Overheating
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
You will find a coolant temperature gauge
on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See
“Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge” in
section 3.
WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you just
open the hood. Stay away from the
engine if you see or hear steam com-
ing from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until
it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine
is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be
badly burned. Stop your engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool.
If you get the overheat warning with no
sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1) In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK
(P) or NEUTRAL and let the engine
idle.
2) Turn on your heater to full hot at the
highest fan speed and open the window
as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warn-
ing, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive
slower for about 10 minutes. If the warning
doesn’t come back on, you can drive nor-
mally.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
If the warning continues and you have not
stopped, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there seems to be no leak, with the
engine on, check to see if the electric
engine cooling fan is running. If the engine
is overheating, the fan should be running.
If it isn’t, your vehicle needs service.
WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan under
the hood can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric
fan.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle
the engine for three minutes while you’re
parked. If you still have the warning, turn
off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
CAUTION
Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant isn’t covered
by your warranty.
You may decide not to lift the hood, but to
get service help right away.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank
is boiling, don’t do anything else until it
cools down. The vehicle should be parked
on a level surface. Make sure that the air
conditioning is turned off.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Cooling System
CAUTION
The coolant level should be between the
MIN and MAX marks on the coolant surge
tank when the engine is cool. If it isn’t, you
may have a leak at the pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cool-
ing system.
This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this pro-
cedure could cause your engine to
overheat and be severely damaged.
If you haven’t found a problem yet, check
to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level
isn’t between the MIN and MAX marks,
add a 60/40 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and proper coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See “Engine
Coolant” in this section for more informa-
tion.
WARNING
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t
touch them. If you do, you can be
burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
of the coolant. That could cause an
engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
The engine coolant surge tank is located in
the rear of the engine compartment on the
driver’s side.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank,
add coolant as follows:
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
WARNING
Never turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is hot.
In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater
core and other parts. Use the recom-
mended coolant and the proper cool-
ant mixture.
Steam and scalding liquids from a
hot cooling system can blow out and
burn you badly. They are under pres-
sure, and if you loosen the coolant
surge tank pressure cap – even a lit-
tle – they can come out at high
speed. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to loosen the
pressure cap.
WARNING
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant con-
tains ethylene glycol and it will burn
if the engine parts are hot enough.
Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
L3U5019A
WARNING
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. You
can remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling system,
including the coolant surge tank pres-
sure cap and upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise (left) about two
or two and one-half turns. If you hear a
hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow
any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
Adding only plain water to your cool-
ing system can be dangerous. Plain
water, or some other liquid such as
alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you
wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you
or others could be burned. Use a 60/
40 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and a proper coolant.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
level is lower than the MAX mark, add
more of the proper mixture to the cool-
ant surge tank until the level reaches
the MAX mark.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
2) Then keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
5) Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure
the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully
seated. See your SUZUKI dealer, if
necessary.
Turn the key off and then check the fluid
level. The level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the reservoir. If the
level is below the MIN mark, add power
steering fluid.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is
located toward the front of the engine com-
partment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
See “Engine Compartment Overview” in
this section for more information on loca-
tion.
3) Fill the coolant surge tank with the
proper mixture to the MAX mark on the
coolant surge tank. Wait about five min-
utes, then check to see if the level is
below the MAX mark. If the level is
below the MAX mark, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to the MAX
mark. Repeat this procedure until the
level remains constant at the MAX mark
for at least five minutes.
4) With the coolant surge tank pressure
cap off, start the engine and let it run
until you can feel the upper radiator
hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in
section 6. Always use the proper fluid. Fail-
ure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks
and can damage hoses and seals.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check
power steering fluid unless you suspect
there is a leak in the system or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired.
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Brakes
Adding Washer Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is
located near the back of the engine com-
partment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
It is filled with DOT-3 brake fluid. See
“Engine Compartment Overview” in this
section for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake
fluid level in the reservoir might go down.
The first is that the brake fluid goes down
to an acceptable level during normal brake
lining wear.
Open the cap with the washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
CAUTION
• When using concentrated washer
fluid, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for adding water.
• Don’t mix water with ready-to-use
washer fluid. Water can cause the
solution to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water
doesn’t clean as well as washer
fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very
cold. This allows for expansion if
freezing occurs, which could dam-
age the tank if it is completely full.
• Don’t use engine coolant (anti-
freeze) in your windshield washer.
It can damage your washer system
and paint.
When new linings are put in, the fluid level
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid
is leaking out of the brake system. If it is,
you should have your brake system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner or later
your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work
at all.
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is
located in the front of the engine compart-
ment on the driver’s side. See “Engine
Compartment Overview” in this section for
more information on location.
What to Use
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your
brake fluid. Adding brake fluid won’t correct
a leak. If you add fluid when your linings
are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid
when you get new brake linings. You
should add (or remove) brake fluid, as nec-
essary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
When you need windshield washer fluid,
be sure to read the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions before use. If you will be operating
your vehicle in an area where the tempera-
ture may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against freez-
ing.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
CAUTION
WARNING
If you have too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will
burn if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and your
vehicle could be damaged.
• Using the wrong fluid can badly
damage brake system parts. For
example, just a few drops of min-
eral-based oil, such as engine oil,
in your brake system can damage
brake system parts so badly that
they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let
someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon your brakes won’t
work well. That could lead to an acci-
dent. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level,
your brake warning light will come on. See
“Brake System Warning Light” in section 3.
CAUTION
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehi-
cle’s painted surfaces, the paint fin-
ish can be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately.
See “Appearance Care” in the
Index.
Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly
brake repair.
What to Add
from a sealed container only. See “Recom-
mended Fluids and Lubricants” in section
6.
Some driving conditions or climates may
cause a brake squeal when the brakes are
first applied or lightly applied. This does
not mean something is wrong with your
brakes.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap
and the area around the cap before remov-
ing it. This will help keep dirt from entering
the reservoir.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front and rear disc brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary
to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires
are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear
and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper
sequence to SUZUKI torque specifica-
tions.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indica-
tors that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and
new pads are needed. The sound may
come and go or be heard all the time your
vehicle is moving (except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in your
brake system, your brakes may not
work well, or they may not even work
at all. This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake fluid.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in section
6.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Brake Pedal Travel
Battery
Jump Starting
See your SUZUKI dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height, or if there
is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This
could be a sign of brake trouble.
Your new vehicle comes with a mainte-
nance free battery. When it’s time for a new
battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s
label. See “Engine Compartment Over-
view” in this section for battery location.
If your battery has run down, you may want
to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to fol-
low the steps below to do it safely.
Brake Adjustment
WARNING
Every time you make a moderate brake
stop, your disc brakes adjust for wear. If
you rarely make a moderate or heavier
stop, then your brakes might not adjust
correctly. If you drive in that way, then –
very carefully – make a few moderate
brake stops about every 1,000 miles
(1,600 km), so your brakes will adjust prop-
erly.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
• They contain acid that can burn
you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these things
can hurt you.
Vehicle Storage
Replacing Brake System Parts
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, nega-
tive (–) cable from the battery. This will
help keep your battery from running down.
The braking system on a vehicle is com-
plex. Its many parts have to be of top qual-
ity and work well together if the vehicle is
to have really good braking. When you
replace parts of your braking system – for
example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in – be
sure you get new approved SUZUKI
replacement parts. If you don’t, your
brakes may no longer work properly. For
example, if someone puts in brake linings
that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can
change – for the worse. The braking per-
formance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following steps could
result in costly damage to your vehi-
cle that wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by push-
ing or pulling it won’t work, and it
could damage your vehicle.
WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn you
and gas that can explode. You can be
badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See
the next section, “Jump Starting”, for
tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
1) Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
Contact your SUZUKI dealer to learn how
to prepare your vehicle for longer storage
periods.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
3) Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories
WARNING
plugged into the cigarette lighter or in
the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that aren’t needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries. And it could save your
radio!
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt sys-
tem with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with
negative grounds to jump start your
vehicle.
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode. People
have been hurt doing this, and some
have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You don’t need to add water to
the battery installed in your new vehi-
cle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explo-
sive gas could be present.
4) Open the hoods and locate the batter-
ies. Find the positive (+) and negative
(–) terminal locations on each vehicle.
Your vehicle’s positive (+) terminal is
located under a red tethered cap on the
battery. The negative (–) terminal is
located under a black tethered cap on
the battery. See “Engine Compartment
Overview” in this section for more infor-
mation on location. Flip the caps up to
access the positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals.
2) Get the vehicles close enough so the
jumper cables can reach, but be sure
the vehicles aren’t touching each other.
If they are, it could cause a ground con-
grounding could damage the electrical
systems.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Don’t get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on
your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles
rolling, set the parking brake firmly on
both vehicles involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic transmis-
sion in PARK (P) or a manual transmis-
sion in NEUTRAL before setting the
parking brake.
WARNING
5) Check that the jumper cables don’t
have loose or missing insulation. If they
do, you could get a shock. The vehicles
could be damaged, too.
An electric fan under the hood can
start up and injure you even when the
engine is not running. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehi-
cle has one. Negative (–) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or
to a remote negative (–) terminal if the
vehicle with the dead battery has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative
(–) or you’ll get a short that would dam-
CAUTION
If you leave your radio or other acces-
sories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged.
The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty. Always turn off your
radio and other accessories when
jump starting your vehicle.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
age the battery and maybe other parts,
too. And don’t connect the negative (–)
cable to the negative (–) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause
sparks.
trical connection is just as good there,
and the chance of sparks getting back
to the battery is much less.
10)Now start the vehicle with the good bat-
tery and run the engine for a while.
11)Try to start the vehicle that had the
dead battery. If it won’t start after a few
tries, it probably needs service.
WARNING
An electric fan under the hood can
start up and injure you even when the
engine is not running. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
7) Don’t let the other end touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of
the good battery. Use a remote positive
(+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
CAUTION
Damage to your vehicle may result
from electrical shorting if jumper
cables are removed incorrectly. To
prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each
other or any other metal. The repairs
wouldn’t be covered by your war-
ranty.
8) Now connect the black negative (–)
cable to the negative (–) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote negative (–)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative (–) cable doesn’t go to the
dead battery. It goes to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a
remote negative (–) terminal on the
vehicle with the dead battery.
6) Connect the red positive (+) cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) termi-
nal if the vehicle has one.
9) Connect the other end of the negative
(–) cable at least 18 inches (45 cm)
away from the dead battery, but not
near engine parts that move. The elec-
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Jumper Cable Removal
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident,
the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim
adjustment of the low beam may be neces-
sary if it is difficult to see lane markers, for
horizontal aim, or if oncoming drivers flash
their high beams at you, for vertical aim. If
you believe your headlamps need to be re-
aimed, we recommend that you take your
vehicle to the dealer for service. However,
it is possible for you to re-aim your head-
lamps by following the procedure in the
service manual for your vehicle.
For the type of bulb to use, see “Replace-
ment Bulbs” in this section. For any bulb
changing procedure not listed in this sec-
tion, contact your SUZUKI dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could
be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
CAUTION
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
To make sure your headlamps are
aimed properly, read all the instruc-
tions before beginning. Failure to fol-
low these instructions could cause
damage to headlamp parts.
C. Dead Battery
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1) Disconnect the black negative (–) cable
from the vehicle that had the dead bat-
tery.
2) Disconnect the black negative (–) cable
from the vehicle with the good battery.
3) Disconnect the red positive (+) cable
from the vehicle with the good battery.
4) Disconnect the red positive (+) cable
from the other vehicle.
5) Return the terminal cover to its original
position.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
10)Reverse the steps 1 and 2 to reinstall
the headlamp assembly. Then, check
the lamps.
7) Install the socket into the lamp housing
by turning it clockwise.
8) Reverse the steps 1 and 2 to reinstall
the headlamp assembly. Then, check
the lamps.
Headlamps
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
N4U5042A
To replace a headlamp bulb:
1) Open the hood.
N4U5043A
2) Remove the two bolts and one nut
shown in the illustration that retain the
headlamp assembly.
3) Disconnect the wiring harness connec-
tor from the rear of the bulb.
4) Remove the headlamp cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
5) Release the spring that retains the bulb.
6) Remove the old bulb.
7) Install the new bulb. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in this section for the proper
bulb.
8) Install the bulb retaining spring.
9) Install the wiring harness connector to
the bulb and replace the headlamp cap
by turning it clockwise.
To replace a front turn signal lamp bulb:
1) Open the hood.
To replace a front fog lamp bulb:
2) Remove the two bolts and one nut and
remove the headlamp assembly.
3) Turn the front turn signal bulb socket
counterclockwise.
1) Disconnect the wiring harness connec-
tor from the front fog lamp bulb.
2) Rotate the front fog lamp bulb counter-
clockwise and remove it.
3) Replace the bulb. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in this section for the proper
bulb.
4) Pull the front turn signal bulb socket out
of the lamp housing.
5) Press the bulb inward and turn it coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the bulb
socket.
6) Install the new bulb into the bulb socket
by pressing it in and turning it clock-
wise. See “Replacement Bulbs” in this
section for the proper bulb.
4) Connect the wiring harness connector
to the front fog lamp bulb.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
Luggage Compartment Lamp
Tail/Stop Lamps and Rear Turn Sig-
nal Lamps
N4U5046A
N4U5044A
To replace a center high-mounted stop
lamp bulb:
To replace a luggage compartment lamp
bulb:
To replace a tail/stop lamp or a rear turn
signal lamp bulb:
1) Open the liftgate.
1) Use a flat screwdriver to pry the lamp
assembly from the lamp assembly
holder.
2) Pry off the trim and remove the two
screws shown in the illustration.
3) Remove the bulb socket from the lamp
housing.
1) Open the liftgate.
2) Remove the two screws and the lamp
assembly.
3) Remove the bulb socket from the lamp
housing by turning the bulb socket
counterclockwise.
2) Replace the bulb. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in this section for the proper
bulb.
4) Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out of the bulb socket.
3) Reinstall the lamp assembly.
5) Install the appropriate bulb into the
socket. See “Replacement Bulbs” in
this section.
6) Replace the lamp housing and trim in
reverse order.
4) Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing the bulb and turning it counter-
clockwise.
5) Install the appropriate bulb into the
socket. See “Replacement Bulbs” in
this section.
6) Replace the bulb socket into the lamp
housing.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Backup Lamps and Tail/Stop Lamps License Plate Lamps
7) Replace the lamp housing into the vehi-
cle using the two screws removed ear-
lier.
8) Close the liftgate.
N4U5029B
N4U5045A
To replace a backup lamp or a tail/stop
lamp bulb:
To replace a license plate lamp bulb:
1) Remove the two screws shown in the
illustration and the lamp cover.
2) To remove the bulb holder from the
lamp housing, rotate the bulb holder
counterclockwise.
1) Open the liftgate.
2) Remove the protective cover.
3) Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
4) Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing the bulb and turning it counter-
clockwise.
5) Install the appropriate bulb into the
socket. See “Replacement Bulbs” in
this section.
6) Replace the bulb socket into the lamp
housing. Turn the bulb socket clockwise
to secure it.
3) Pull the bulb out from the bulb holder.
4) Replace the bulb. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in this section for the proper
bulb.
5) Install the bulb holder into the lamp
housing by rotating the bulb holder
clockwise.
6) Replace the lamp cover.
7) Replace the protective cover and close
the liftgate.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Rear Sidemarker Lamps
Replacement Bulbs
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Wattages
Bulb
No.
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected at least twice a year for wear or
cracking. If the wiper blades become brittle
or damaged, or make streaks when wiping,
replace the wiper blades for optimum driv-
ing visibility. Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed in different
ways.
Bulb
x
Quantity
High-Beam
Headlamp
55W x 2
55W x 2
H1
H1
Low-Beam
Headlamp
Front Turn Signal
Lamp
28/8W x 2 2357NA
27/8W x 4 1157
27W x 2 1156NA
Here’s how to remove the Shepherd’s
Hook type:
Stop Lamp/
Tail Lamp
To replace a rear sidemarker lamp bulb:
Rear Turn Signal
Lamp
1) Insert your hand into the inside of the
rear bumper and hold the socket.
2) Rotate the rear sidemarker lamp bulb
socket counterclockwise.
3) Pull the rear sidemarker bulb socket out
of the rear bumper.
4) Pull the old bulb straight out from the
bulb socket.
5) Push a new bulb straight into the
socket.
Backup Lamp
27W x 2
5W x 2
1156
168
License Plate
Lamp
Center
High-Mounted
Stop Lamp
5W x 5
5W x 2
168
168
Rear Sidemarker
Lamp
6) Reverse the steps 1 through 3 to rein-
stall the bulb socket.
1) Pull the windshield wiper arm away
from the windshield.
2) Press the retaining clip (A) and pull the
wiper blade off the arm.
3) Install a new blade by reversing the
steps 1 and 2.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
tration later in this section for more
detail.
B. Department of Transportation (DOT)
Code
Tires
WARNING
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality
tires made by a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about your tire
warranty and where to obtain service, see
your SUZUKI Warranty booklet for details.
(Continued)
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been damaged,
replace them.
The Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S. Department
of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your
vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
C. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The letters and numbers following the
DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size
and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded on to both sides of
the tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
Useful information about a tire is molded
into its sidewall. The examples below show
a typical passenger car tire and a spare
tire sidewall.
WARNING
Poorly maintained and improperly
used tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See “Load-
ing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause
serious injury. Check all tires fre-
quently to maintain the recom-
mended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires
are cold.
Passenger Car Tire Example
D. Tire Ply Material
The type of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under the tread.
E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
Tire manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three perfor-
mance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance.
F. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit
Maximum load that can be carried
and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
G. Load Index and Speed Rating
The two- or three-digit number is the
tire’s load index, the maximum load a
tire can carry at the speed indicated
by its speed symbol at the maximum
inflation pressure. The higher the
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured or broken by a
sudden impact – such as when you
hit a pothole. Keep tires at the rec-
ommended pressure.
A. Tire Size
The tire size is a combination of let-
ters and numbers used to define a
particular tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illus-
(Continued)
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
number is, the greater the load carry-
ing capacity. The letter symbol
denotes the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time. (Ratings are listed
below.)
Compact Spare Tire Example
and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load. See “Compact
Spare Tire” in this section and “Load-
ing Your Vehicle” in section 4.
E. Tire Inflation Pressure
The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on
tire pressure and inflation, see “Tire
Inflation Pressure” in this section.
F. Tire Size
A combination of letters and numbers
defining a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service
description. The letter “T” as the first
character in the tire size means the
tire is for temporary use only.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
99 mph
Q
R
S
T
106 mph
112 mph
118 mph
124 mph
130 mph
149 mph
168 mph*
186 mph*
U
H
V
W
Y
A. Temporary Use Only Marking
The compact spare tire should not be
driven at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/
h). The compact spare tire is for
emergency use when a regular road
tire has lost air and gone flat. See
“Compact Spare Tire” and “If a Tire
Goes Flat” in this section.
Tire Size
WARNING
Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires
which are all the same type and size.
This is important to ensure proper
steering and handling of the vehicle.
Never mix tires of different size or
type on the four wheels of your vehi-
cle. Mixing tires could cause you to
lose control while driving which may
lead to an accident. The size and type
of tires used should be only those
approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-
tion as standard or optional equip-
ment for your vehicle.
B. Tire Ply Material
*The letters ZR may be used on tires with a
maximum speed capability over 149 mph
and will always be used on tires with a
maximum speed capability over 186 mph.
The type of cord and number of plies
in the sidewall and under the tread.
C. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN)
shows the manufacturer and plant
code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of
manufacture.
D. Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit
Maximum load that can be carried
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Glossary of Tire Terminology
tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is
wide.
Air Pressure:
D. Construction Code
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
A letter code is used to indicate the
type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter “R” means radial ply construc-
tion, the letter “D” means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the letter
“B” means belted-bias ply construc-
tion.
Accessory Weight:
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are automatic trans-
mission, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, and air con-
ditioning.
E. Rim Diameter
Diameter of the wheel in inches.
F. Service Description
These characters represent the load
range and the speed rating of a tire.
The load range represents the load
carrying capacity a tire is certified to
carry. The speed rating is the maxi-
mum speed a tire is certified to carry
a load. Speed ratings range from “A”
to “Z”.
Aspect Ratio:
The relationship of a tire’s height to its
width.
The following illustration shows an exam-
ple of a typical passenger car tire size.
A. Tire Type
Belt:
This letter code indicates the primary
intended use of the tire. The “P” as
the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engi-
neered to standards set by the U.S.
Tire and Rim Association.
A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread.
Cords may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead:
B. Tire Width
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
Bias Ply Tire:
C. Aspect Ratio
A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
A two-digit number that indicates the
tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect
ratio is “70”, as shown in item “C” of
the illustration, it would mean that the
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Cold Inflation Pressure:
Kilopascal (kPa):
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white let-
tering or bears manufacturer, brand and or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
The amount of air pressure in a tire, mea-
sured in pounds per square inch (psi)
before a tire has built up heat from driving.
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks and some
multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Curb Weight:
This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil
and coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Load Index:
An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Production Options Weight:
DOT Markings:
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
2.3 kilograms in excess of those standard
items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory
weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
A code molded into the sidewall of a tire
signifying that the tire is in compliance with
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification Num-
ber (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufac-
turer, production plant, brand and date of
production.
The maximum air pressure to which a cold
tire may be inflated. The maximum air
pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire
inflation pressure shown on the tire plac-
ard.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and production
options weight.
GVWR:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
This is the maximum permissible overall
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including
all occupants, accessories and cargo).
Radial Ply Tire:
Normal Occupant Weight:
The number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg).
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR:
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
This is the maximum permissible weight on
an individual axle.
Rim:
Occupant Distribution:
A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as
specified in the third column of Table 1
(shown below).
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
Sidewall:
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Outward Facing Sidewall:
The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that faces outward when
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Speed Rating:
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share
of the curb weight, accessory weight, and
normal occupant weight (distributed in
accordance with Table 1 shown below) and
dividing by 2.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire
indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
If your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system, it uses pressure
sensors containing a unique identification
code to monitor the inflation pressure of
the tires. When the inflation pressure of
one or more tires indicates significant
under-inflation, the tire pressure warning
light comes on. If the warning light blinks,
for approximately one minute and then illu-
minates continuously, the monitoring sys-
tem may not be working. For more
information, see “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light” in section 3.
Traction:
The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
TABLE 1 – Occupant Loading and Dis-
tribution For Vehicle Normal Load For
Various Designated Seating Capacities
Tread:
The portion of a tire that comes into con-
tact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators:
Designated
Vehicle nor-
Occupant
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear
bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains.
seating capac- mal load, num- distribution in
ity, number of ber of
occupants
a normally
loaded vehicle
occupants
2 through 4
2
3
2 in front
UTQGS:
The tire pressure monitoring system does
not replace normal tire maintenance. See
“Inflation – Tire Pressure & Correcting the
Tire Pressure” in this section for more
information.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a
tire information system that provides con-
sumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The rat-
ings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
2 in front, 1 in
second seat
5 through 10
Vehicle Placard:
A label permanently attached to a vehicle
showing the original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation pressure.
WARNING
If the tire pressure warning light does
not come on when the ignition is
turned to the “ON” position, or
comes on and blinks while driving
there may be a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system. Have
your vehicle inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated seating posi-
tions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
The load on an individual tire that is deter-
mined by distributing to each axle its share
of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and
dividing by two.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
itoring system. Have tire and wheel
replacement performed by an authorized
service facility to avoid the risk of damag-
ing the tire pressure monitor sensors.
CAUTION
If the tire pressure warning light
comes on and stays on, reduce your
speed and avoid abrupt steering and
braking. Stop in a safe place as soon
as possible and check your tires.
• If you have a flat tire, replace it with
a spare tire. Refer to “Changing a
Flat Tire” in section 5.
• If one or more of your tires is
under-inflated, adjust the inflation
pressure in all of your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure as
soon as possible.
Be aware that driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire can cause
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure, and may affect steering
control and brake effectiveness. This
could lead to an accident, resulting in
severe injury or death.
• Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as air pressure sensors can be
damaged.
WARNING
• In case of tire a bursting or sudden
pressure drops, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light
may not come on immediately.
• The inflation pressures vary with
the ambient temperature. If the
vehicle is subjected to large varia-
tions in ambient temperature, the
tire inflation pressure may be
under-inflated when the ambient
temperature is relatively low. If the
warning light comes on, adjust the
tire inflation pressure.
• The tire pressure sensors can be
damaged by the installation or
removal of tires. When tires must
be repaired or replaced, we highly
recommend that you have them
repaired or replaced by your
SUZUKI dealer.
Only use tires and wheels recom-
mended by us as standard or
optional equipment for your vehicle.
Use of tires or wheels not recom-
mended by us can result in TPMS fail-
ure. Refer to “Tires” in the “SERVICE
AND APPEARANCE CARE” section
for additional information.
The tire pressure monitoring system may
not work normally in the following circum-
stances:
• Wheels other than genuine wheels are
being used.
• Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
rized by the vehicle are used. The moni-
toring system should be set up by an
authorized service facility.
• Wheels that are not fitted with tire pres-
sure sensors are being used.
• The tire inflation pressure sensors’ bat-
tery is exhausted.
• A wireless facility or device using the
same frequency is near the vehicle.
• Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
and/or on the wheels.
The tire pressure warning light can come
on due to normal causes such as natural
air leaks and pressure changes caused by
changes in temperature or atmospheric
pressure. Adjusting the air pressure in the
tires to the pressure shown on the tire and
loading information label should cause the
tire pressure warning light to turn off.
• If the tire pressure warning light
comes on or blinks frequently,
there may be something wrong
with one of the tires or with the
monitoring system. Have your vehi-
cle inspected by your SUZUKI
dealer.
If you use new wheels with new tire infla-
tion pressure sensors, their ID codes must
be programmed into the tire pressure mon-
The tire pressure monitoring system oper-
ates on a radio frequency subject to Fed-
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
eral Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry and Science Can-
ada.
Correcting the Tire Pressure
33 psi
To permanently eliminate the low tire pres-
sure warning light, you must fill the tires
with the correct amount of air. However, at
the next vehicle start-up, the warning light
will reappear if the tire pressure is not cor-
rected. The best time to check your tire
pressure is when the tires are cold. A Tire
and Loading Information label, located on
the driver’s door near the door latch,
shows the correct inflation pressure for the
tires when they are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three
hours or driven no more than one mile.
You may notice during cooler conditions
that low tire pressure warning light will
appear when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off as you start to drive the vehi-
cle. This could be an early indicator that
your tire pressures are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Tire
Pressure
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
(228 kPa)
195/55R15
33 psi
(228 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
60 psi
(420 kPa)
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
125/70D15
(Temporary)
WARNING
• Air pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold or you may
get inaccurate readings.
• Check the inflation pressure from
time to time while inflating the tire
gradually, until the specified pres-
sure is obtained.
• Never underinflate or overinflate
the tires.
Underinflation can cause unusual
handling characteristics or can
cause the rim to slip on the tire
bead, resulting in an accident or
damage to the tire or rim.
Underinflation can also cause tires
to overheat, leading to tire failure.
Overinflation can cause the tire to
burst, resulting in personal injury.
Overinflation can also cause
unusual handling characteristics
which may result in an accident.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
NOTE:
Only use tire sizes that are recommended
for your vehicle. Use of inappropriate-size
tires can cause a variety of problems which
will not be covered under warranty.
Tire Inflation Pressure
The Tire and Loading Information label
shows the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile
(1.6 km). See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
section 4.
WARNING
We highly recommend that any TPMS
sensor replacement or tire rotation
be done by an authorized Suzuki
dealer. The dealer will make sure that
the TPMS system is set up to recog-
nize the ID codes of the TPMS sen-
sors.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
When to Check
Don’t include the compact spare tire in
your tire rotation.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a
month.
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles
(12,000 km).
Check your tires each time you fill your fuel
tank or at least once a month using a tire
pressure gauge.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust
the front and rear inflation pressures as
shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut
Torque” under “Capacities and Specifica-
tions” in this section.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate
your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged
tires or wheels. See “When It Is Time for
New Tires” and “Wheel Replacement” in
this section for more information.
How to check
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your
tires are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has
been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
The purpose of regular rotation is to
achieve more uniform wear for all tires on
the vehicle. The first rotation is the most
important. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in section 6, for scheduled rota-
tion intervals.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose after
a time. The wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you change
a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do
this, but be sure to use a scraper or
wire brush later, if you need to, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing
a Flat Tire” in this section.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve
stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the
valve to get a pressure measurement. If
the cold tire inflation pressure is low, add
air until you reach the recommended pres-
sure.
If you overfill the tire, release air by push-
ing on the metal stem in the center of the
tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with
the tire gauge.
Vehicle Loading
The tires on your vehicle, when they are
inflated to the recommended tire inflation
pressure, have a load-carrying capacity
that is greater than the load that will be on
the tires when the vehicle is at its GVWR
or GAWR limit. Never use replacement
tires that have a load-carrying capacity
less than the original tires on your vehicle.
Tire load-carrying capacity information is
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
molded into the tire sidewall typically
shown as “Max. Load”. Use of replacement
tires with a lower load-carrying capacity
than the original tires, or failure to keep the
tires inflated to the recommended tire pres-
sure, may reduce the GVWR or GAWR
limit of your vehicle.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires
which are all the same type and size.
This is important to ensure proper
steering and handling of the vehicle.
Never mix tires of different size or
type on the four wheels of your vehi-
cle. The size and type of tires used
should be only those approved by
SUZUKI Motor Corporation as stan-
dard or optional equipment for your
vehicle.
• You can see the indicators at three or
more places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing
through the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or
fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other
damage that can’t be repaired well
because of the size or location of the
damage.
NOTE:
Use of replacement tires with a higher
load-carrying capacity than the original
tires, or using a tire inflation pressure
higher than the recommended tire inflation
pressure, will not increase the GVWR or
GAWR limit of your vehicle.
WARNING
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
Replacing the wheels and tires
equipped on your vehicle with certain
combinations of aftermarket wheels
and tires can significantly change the
steering and handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle. Oversized tires
may also rub against the fender over
bumps, causing vehicle damage or
tire failure. Therefore, use only those
To find out what kind and size of tires you
need, look at the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation label.
Make sure the replacements are the same
size, load range, speed rating and con-
struction type (bias, bias-belted or radial)
as your original tires.
wheel
and
tire
combinations
approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-
tion as standard or optional equip-
ment
for
your
vehicle.
For
information regarding the specified
tires, refer to the Tire Information
Label located on the driver’s side
door pillar or “Tire Inflation Pres-
sure” in this section.
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires
is to check the treadwear indicators, which
will appear when your tires have only 1/16
inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
they all conform to federal safety require-
ments.
Temperature – A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the high-
est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
perature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Replacing the original tires with tires
of a different size may result in false
speedometer or odometer readings.
Check with your SUZUKI dealer
before purchasing replacement tires
that differ in size from the original
tires.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and a half (1.5) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between the
width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Traction – AA, A, B, C
WARNING
The traction grades, from highest to low-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
The following information relates to the
system developed by the United States
National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration, which grades tires by treadwear,
traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the
United States.) The grades are molded on
the sidewalls of most passenger car tires.
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diame-
ters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to
some limited-production tires.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to
give you the longest tire life and best over-
all performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not
include
acceleration,
cornering,
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel bal-
ancing are not needed. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle
hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
While the tires available on SUZUKI vehi-
cles may vary with respect to these grades,
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, your wheels may need to be rebal-
anced.
Used Replacement Wheels
WARNING
WARNING
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your
vehicle can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
your vehicle, make your tires lose air
and make you lose control. You could
have a collision in which you or oth-
ers could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
nuts for replacement.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle
is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s
been used or how far it’s been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a
crash. If you have to replace a wheel,
use a new SUZUKI original equip-
ment wheel.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or
badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts
keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts
and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes
be repaired). See your SUZUKI dealer if
any of these conditions exist.
Tire Chains
CAUTION
CAUTION
Your SUZUKI dealer will know the kind of
wheel you need.
Use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use only SAE
class “S” type chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them
on the front tires and tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops.
Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake
cooling, speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and
tire or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, off-
set and be mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels,
wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them
only with new SUZUKI original equipment
parts. This way, you will be sure to have
the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in this section
for more information.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s a unusual for a tire to “blowout” while
you’re driving, especially if you maintain
your tire properly. If air goes out of a tire,
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
it’s much more likely to leak out slowly. But
if you should ever have a “blowout”, here
are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how
to use your jacking equipment to change a
flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a
drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then gently
brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and
wheel damage by driving slowly to a level
place. Turn on your hazard warning flash-
ers.
WARNING
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve,
acts much like a skid and may require the
same correction you’d use in a skid. In any
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under
control by steering the way you want the
vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and
noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a tire can cause an injury.
The vehicle can slip off the jack and
roll over you or other people. You and
they could be severely injured. Find a
level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from mov-
ing:
1) Set the parking brake firmly.
2) Put an automatic transmission
shift lever in PARK (P), or shift a
manual transmission to FIRST (1)
or REVERSE (R).
3) Turn off the engine and do not
restart while the vehicle is raised.
4) Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle
won’t move, you should put blocks at
the front and rear of the tire farthest
away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehi-
cle.
The following steps will tell you how to use
the jack to change a tire.
WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it
to do maintenance or repairs is dan-
gerous without the appropriate safety
equipment and training. The jack pro-
vided with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others
could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. Use the jack
provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
4) Remove the compact spare tire. See
“Compact Spare Tire” in this section for
more information.
5) Remove the jack, jack handle and the
wheel wrench. The jack is located in the
cargo area. Turn the jack retainer,
located on the right side of the jack,
counterclockwise to release it. The jack
handle and the wheel wrench are
located inside the foam tray.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1) If your vehicle is equipped with wheel
covers, loosen the 4 plastic caps by
hand with the aid of the wheel wrench
and remove the wheel cover.
2) Then use the wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel nuts. Don’t remove them
yet.
3) Near each wheel well is a notch in the
frame which the jack head fits in.
A. Jack
B. Wrench
Position the jack and raise the jack
head until it fits firmly into the notch in
the vehicle’s frame nearest the flat tire.
Put the compact spare tire near you.
C. Jack Handle
D. Screwdriver
The compartment spare tire and tools
you’ll need are located in the trunk.
WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle
slips off the jack you could be badly
injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a
jack.
WARNING
Only use the jack for lifting this car
during an emergency tire change.
1) Remove the trim cover from the floor of
the cargo area by pulling up on the tab.
2) Remove the foam tray that contains the
tools.
3) Turn the retainer on the compact spare
tire counterclockwise and remove the
retainer.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
WARNING
WARNING
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage
the vehicle and even make the vehi-
cle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Never use oil or grease on studs or
nuts. If you do, the nuts might come
loose. Your wheel could fall off, caus-
ing a serious accident.
9) Place the compact spare tire on the
wheel-mounting surface.
10)Reinstall the wheel nuts with the
rounded end of the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each wheel nut by turn-
ing it clockwise with your hand until the
wheel is held against the hub.
11)Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel
handle counterclockwise. Lower the
jack completely.
8) Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting surfaces and spare
wheel.
WARNING
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make the wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from the places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emer-
gency, you can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this, but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
4) Insert the jack handle and the wheel
wrench into the jack.
5) Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
handle clockwise. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there is
enough room for the compact spare tire
to fit underneath the wheel well.
6) Remove all of the wheel nuts by turning
them counterclockwise.
12)Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss-
cross sequence as shown.
7) Remove the flat tire.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to come loose and even come
off. This could lead to an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If
you have to replace them, be sure to
get new SUZUKI original equipment
wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the nuts tight-
ened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See
“Capacities and Specifications” in
the Index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
If you install a full-size tire rather than
your compact spare tire, reinstall the
wheel cover as follows:
1) Put the wheel cover on the full-
size tire.
2) Fasten the 4 plastic caps snugly
by hand.
3) Tighten the caps by turning them
an additional 90° with the wheel
wrench.
– The proper tightening torque is a
maximum of 5.9 lb-ft (8 N·m).
– Tightening to the improper
torque can cause damage to the
plastic caps.
Improperly storing a jack, a tire, or
other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store all these items in the
proper place.
Store the flat tire in the compact spare tire
compartment. Place the tire in the com-
partment, then secure the retainer. Store
the jack in its housing in the cargo area.
Secure the jack by turning the retainer
clockwise. Store the tools securely in the
foam tray and place the tray on top of the
tire. Replace the trim cover.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor
damage. To avoid expensive brake
repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts
in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
“Capacities and Specifications” in
the index for the wheel nut torque
specification.
WARNING
Wheel covers will not fit on your com-
pact spare. If you try to put a wheel
cover on the compact spare, you
could damage the cover or the spare.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equip-
ment in the passenger compartment
of the vehicle could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your com-
pact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel
cover in the trunk until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
The compact spare tire is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact spare tire
with a full-size tire as soon as you can. See
“Compact Spare Tire” in this section.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully
inflated when your vehicle was new, it can
lose air after a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be 60 psi (420
kPa).
CAUTION
WARNING
Tire chains won’t fit your compact
spare tire. Using them can damage
your vehicle and can damage the
chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
(Continued)
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. If you must use tire
chains, rearrange the wheels so
standard tires and wheels are fitted
to the front axle.
• The compact spare tire has a much
shorter tread life than the conven-
tional tires on your vehicle.
Replace the tire as soon as the
tread wear indicator appears.
After installing the compact spare tire on
your vehicle, you should stop as soon as
possible and make sure your compact
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact
spare tire is made to perform well at
speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you
can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want.
with a full-size tire as soon as you can.
Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
WARNING
The compact spare tire and wheel are
intended for temporary emergency
use only. Continuous use of the com-
pact spare tire can result in tire fail-
ure and loss of control. Always
observe these precautions when
using the compact spare tire:
• Your vehicle will handle differently
with this temporary spare.
• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)
speed.
• Replace the compact spare tire
with a standard tire and wheel as
soon as possible.
• When replacing the compact spare
tire, use a replacement tire with the
exact same size and construction.
CAUTION
When the compact spare tire is
installed, don’t take your vehicle
through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can
get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and
maybe other parts of your vehicle.
• Use of the compact spare tire will
reduce ground clearance.
• Recommended air pressure for the
compact spare tire is 420 kPa (60
psi).
Don’t use your compact spare tire on other
vehicles.
(Continued)
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They
won’t fit. Keep your compact spare tire and
its wheel together.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Using Cleaner on Fabric
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of
dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather,
plastic and painted surfaces with a clean,
damp cloth.
Appearance Care
1) Vacuum and brush the area to remove
any loose dirt.
Remember, cleaning products can be haz-
ardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst
into flames if you strike a match or get
them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some
are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in
a closed space. When you use anything
from a container to clean your vehicle, be
sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your
doors or windows when you are cleaning
the inside.
2) Always clean a whole trim panel or sec-
tion. Mask surrounding trim along stitch
or welt lines.
3) Follow the directions on the container
label.
4) Apply cleaner with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t
rub it roughly.
5) As soon as you’ve cleaned the section,
use a sponge to remove any excess
cleaner.
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your SUZUKI dealer has cleaners for the
cleaning of fabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well.
You can get SUZUKI approved cleaning
products from your SUZUKI dealer. See
“Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials” later
in this section.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
6) Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-
dampened towel or cloth.
7) Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
• Gasoline
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Benzene
• Naphtha
• Always read the instructions on the
cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can –
before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change
to a clean area often. A soft brush may
be used if stains are stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot clean-
ing, clean the entire area immediately or
it will set.
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
Specific Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup,
coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk,
soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be
removed as follows:
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
1) Carefully scrape off excess stain, then
sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2) If a stain remains, follow the cleaner
instructions described earlier.
They can all be hazardous – some more
than others – and they can all damage
your vehicle, too.
3) If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or
urine, treat the area with a water/baking
soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of bak-
ing soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm
water.
Do not use any of these unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will
damage your vehicle:
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
4) Let dry.
• Reducing Agents
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, may-
onnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains
can be removed as follows:
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the
top surfaces of the instrument panel.
Sprays containing silicones or waxes may
cause annoying reflections in the wind-
shield and even make it difficult to see
through the windshield under certain con-
ditions.
WARNING
1) Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2) First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3) If a stain remains, follow the cleaner
instructions described earlier.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If
you do, it may severely weaken them.
In a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection. Clean
safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on
a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial clean-
ers may affect the surface finish.
Weatherstrips
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove
dirt. You may have to do this more than
once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish
will stain if you don’t get them off quickly.
Use a clean cloth and vinyl cleaner. See
your SUZUKI dealer for this product.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a
clean cloth at least every six months. Dur-
ing very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. Glass
Cleaner or
a
liquid household glass
cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke
and dust films on interior glass. See “Vehi-
cle Care/Appearance Materials” later in
this section.
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehi-
cle
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a
mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry
with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides
beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and
durability.
CAUTION
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass,
because they may cause scratches.
Avoid placing decals on the inside
rear window, since they may have to
be scraped off later. If abrasive clean-
ers are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element
may be damaged. Any temporary
license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
• For stubborn stains, use
cleaner.
a
leather
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s fin-
ish is to keep it clean by washing it often
with lukewarm or cold water.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based
or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or
shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be
cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to
work into the finish, it can harm the
leather.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays
of the sun. Use a car washing soap. Don’t
use strong soaps or chemical detergents.
Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing
all soap residue completely. You can get
approved cleaning products from your
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
SUZUKI dealer. See “Vehicle Care/
Appearance Materials” later in this section.
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petro-
leum based, or that contain acid or abra-
sives. All cleaning agents should be
flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the fin-
ish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cot-
ton towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the
wiper blades and affect their performance.
Clean the blades by wiping vigorously with
a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blades with
water.
CAUTION
Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish may dull the finish or
leave swirl marks.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as
necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride
and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil
and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals
from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage
your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as
soon as possible. If necessary, use non-
abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
High pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean
cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with
clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry
with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft
cloth and a car washing soap to clean
exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instruc-
tions under Washing Your Vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to
the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t
use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive pol-
ishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them
because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum
wheels.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to
aging, weather and chemical fallout that
can take their toll over a period of years.
You can help to keep the paint finish look-
ing new by keeping your vehicle garaged
or covered whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of
your vehicle by hand may be necessary to
remove residue from the paint finish. You
can get SUZUKI-approved cleaning prod-
ucts from your SUZUKI dealer. See “Vehi-
cle Care/Appearance Materials” later in
this section.
Cleaning Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer, or if the wiper blade
chatters when running, wax, sap or other
material may be on the blade or wind-
shield.
Don’t take your vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can
also damage the surface of these wheels.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat”
paint finish. The clearcoat gives more
depth and gloss to the colored basecoat.
Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with
tire cleaner.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a
full-strength glass cleaning liquid. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form
when you rinse it with water.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
CAUTION
Underbody Maintenance
Description
Usage
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal
and dust control can collect on the under-
body. If these are not removed, acceler-
ated corrosion (rust) can occur on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
When applying
a
tire dressing,
Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior
Wax-Treated
always take care to wipe off any over-
spray or splash from all painted sur-
faces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products
may damage the paint finish and
tires.
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil
and asphalt.
Chrome
Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the underbody with plain water. Clean
any areas where mud and debris can col-
lect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your SUZUKI dealer or an under-
body car washing system can do this for
you.
Sheet Metal Damage
White Sidewall Removes soil and
Tire Cleaner
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
sheet metal repair or replacement, make
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
black marks from
whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and con-
vertible tops.
Original manufacturer replacement parts
will provide the corrosion protection while
maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions
can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pol-
lutants can fall upon and attack painted
surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discol-
orations, and small, irregular dark spots
etched into the paint surface.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and finger-
prints.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be repaired
right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly
and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chrome and
Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dirt and
grime from chrome
wheels and wire
wheel covers.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your SUZUKI dealer for more informa-
tion on purchasing the following products.
Finish
Enhancer
Removes dust, finger-
prints, and surface
contaminants, Spray
on wipe off.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired
with touch-up materials available from your
SUZUKI dealer. Larger areas of finish
damage can be corrected in your SUZUKI
dealer’s body and paint shop.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Vehicle Identification
Electrical System
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Swirl Remover Removes swirl marks,
Polish
fine scratches and
other light surface
contamination.
CAUTION
Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your
SUZUKI dealer first. Some electrical
equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on elec-
trical equipment can keep other com-
ponents from working as they
should.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light
scratches and pro-
tects finish.
Foaming Tire
Shine Low
Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy
step, no wiping neces-
sary.
Wash Wax
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes. Biode-
gradable and phos-
phate free.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to
your vehicle, see “Servicing Your Air Bag-
Equipped Vehicle” in section 1.
Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of
the instrument panel, on the driver’s side.
You can see it if you look through the wind-
shield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification
and Service Parts labels and the certifi-
cates of title and registration.
Headlamp Wiring
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and
stains from carpets,
vinyl and cloth uphol-
stery.
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses,
one for each headlamp, in the fuse block.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps
to turn off. If this happens, have your head-
lamp wiring checked right away.
Odor
Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on
fabrics, vinyl, leather
and carpet.
Engine Identification
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine
code. This code will help you identify your
engine, specifications and replacement
parts.
The windshield wiper motor is protected by
an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the
motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc.,
the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get
it fixed.
See your SUZUKI parts department for
these products.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
used to easily remove fuses from the fuse
block.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect
the power windows and other power
accessories. When the current load is too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes
away.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
10A
AIRBAG
25A
WPR
10A
RADIO/CLK
10A
ECM
10A
AIRBAG
15A
AUX LTR
10A
ABS
15A
TRN SIG LAMPS
15A
LTR
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are pro-
tected from short circuits by a combination
of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible ther-
mal links in the wiring itself.
10A
CLSTR
BTSI
10A
RKE
10A
BCK/UP
10A
TCM
fuse. If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a
bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
10A
ENG FUSE BOX
DRL
15A
HAZRD
LAMPS
15A
A/C
CLK
20A
HVAC
15A
RKE
15A
RADIO
The instrument panel fuse block is located
on the end of the instrument panel on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. To access the
fuses, open the fuse panel door by pulling
the door out.
There are spare fuses provided in the
engine compartment fuse block. If you ever
have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage. Just pick a feature of
your vehicle that you can get along without
– like the radio or cigarette lighter – and
use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
15A
S/ROOF
10A
DLC
10A
SPARE
To reinstall the door, first insert the rear
edge of the fuse panel door, then push the
front of the door into the end of the instru-
ment panel to secure it.
N5U5001B
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle:
the instrument panel fuse block and the
engine compartment fuse block.
There is a fuse puller located on the
engine compartment fuse block. It can be
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuses
AIRBAG
Usages
Air Bag
Fuses
Usages
Engine Fuse box,
Daytime Running
Light
ENG FUSE BOX,
DRL
WPR
Wiper
RADIO/CLK
Radio/Clock
HAZRD LAMPS
A/C, CLK
Hazard Lamps
Engine Control
Module
A/C Switch, Clock
ECM
Heating, Ventilation
and Air Conditioning
HVAC
RKE
Occupation Classifi-
cation Sensor
AIRBAG
AUX LTR
Remote Keyless
Entry
Extra Jack
TRN SIG LAMPS Turn Signal Lamps
RADIO
S/ROOF
DLC
Radio
The engine compartment fuse block is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
near the battery. See “Engine Compart-
ment Overview” in this section for more
information on location.
Antilock Brake
System
Sunroof
ABS
Data link Connector
Spare
LTR
Cigar Lighter
SPARE
Cluster, BTSI
Solenoid
CLSTR, BTSI
To access the fuses, press in the side flaps
to release the cover.
CAUTION
Remote keyless
Entry
RKE
When you inspect the fuse box on
your vehicle, refer to the fuse box
label. The type of fuse box varies
depending on the vehicle’s specifica-
tion.
To reinstall the cover, push until it is
secure.
BCK/UP
BLANK
Back-up
CAUTION
Not Used
When you inspect the fuse box on
your vehicle, refer to the fuse box
label. The type of fuse box varies
depending on the vehicle’s specifica-
tion.
Transmission
Control Module
TCM
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
HEAD LAMPS
ECM
I/P FUSE
FUEL PUMP
A/C
DR/LCK
MIR HTD
FRT FOG
ILLUM LT
INJ
HORN
HI BEAM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
DRIVER’S
PWR WNDW
ENG SNSR
LOW BEAM LT
ILLUM RT
STOP LAMPS
LOW BEAM RT
N4U5038B
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Fuses
Usages
Head Lamp
Fuses
Usages
Relays
Usages
HEAD LAMPS
Head Lamp
Low-Beam Left
COOL FAN LOW Cooling Fan Low
LOW BEAM LT
Engine Control
Module
FRT FOG
ILLUM
Front Fog
ECM
Illumination
Circuit, Parking Lamp
Right
Illumination Relay
ILLUM RT
Instrument Panel
Fuse
I/P FUSE
Air Conditioning
Compressor
A/C CMPRSR
Head Lamp
Low-Beam Right
LOW BEAM RT
FUEL PUMP
A/C
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioning
Horn
HORN
Horn
SPARE
Spare
DEFOG
Defog
HORN
SPARE
Spare
FUEL PUMP
MAIN
Fuel Pump
Main Relay
Cooling Fan High
Power Window
Headlamp Relay
Head Lamp
High-Beam
SPARE
Spare
HI BEAM
BATT PWR
Battery Power
COOL FAN HI
PWR WNDW
HEAD LAMPS
DRIVER’S PWR Driver’s Power
WNDW
Window
Antilock Brake
System
ABS
STOP LAMPS
DR/LCK
Stop Lamps
Door Lock
Heated Mirror
Front Fog
HVAC BLWR
IGN 2
HVAC Blower
Ignition 2
MIR HTD
FRT FOG
IGN 1
Ignition 1
FUSE PLR
Fuse Puller
License Plate Lamp,
Parking Lamp Left
ILLUM LT
INJ
COOL FAN LOW Cooling Fan Low
Injector
DEFOG
Defog
EVAP Canister Purge
Solenoid, HO2S,
Cooling Fan Relay,
CMP Sensor
COOL FAN HI
PWR WNDW
Cooling Fan High
Power Window
ENG SNSR
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Chassis
Specifications
Engine
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are
given in English and metric conversions.
Front Suspension Type
McPherson
Strut Type
Engine
2.0 L DOHC (L6)
Z
Rear Suspension Type
Dual Link
Type
Capacities
VIN Code
Type
Capacities
Application
4-Cylinder / In-Line
Alignment Front Camber –0°33’ 45’
(Curb
English Metric
Valve Train
Displacement
Bore x stroke
DOHC 16 Valve
Rear Camber –1°00’ 45’
Weight)
3
Air Conditioning
1.41 lbs 0.64 kg
Refrigerant R-134a
121.9 in (1,998 cc)
Caster
4°00’ 45’
0°00’ 10’
0°12’ 10’
3.39 in x 3.39 in
(86 mm x 86 mm)
Front Toe-in
Rear Toe-in
Brake/Clutch Fluid
0.53
0.5 L
7.4 L
4.0 L
55.0 L
1.1 L
quarts
Compression Ratio 9.6 : 1
Engine Coolant
7.9
quarts
Octane Rating
87 (Ron 91) or
higher
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
4.2
quarts
Spark Type
FLR8LDCU
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
12V – 55AH
plug
Gap
14.5
gallons
Battery Rating
Cold
Power Steering Fluid
1.2
quarts
Cranking 610 CCA
Ampere
Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid
(Complete Overhaul)
7.3 0.2 6.9
quarts
0.2 L
Manual Transmission
Fluid (Complete Drain
and Refill)
1.9
quarts
1.8 L
Wheel Nut Torque
81 lb-ft 110 N.m
All capacities are approximate. When
adding, be sure to fill to the approximately
level, as recommended in this manual.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
Dimension
Weight
Overall Length
Overall Width
Overall Height
Wheel Base
169.1 in (4,295 mm)
67.9 in (1,725 mm)
56.9 in (1,445 mm)
102.4 in (2,600 mm)
58.3 in (1,480 mm)
58.3 in (1,480 mm)
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
See the safety certifica-
tion label and the tire
information label which
are located on the
driver’s door lock pillar.
Tread
Front
Rear
Minimum Ground
Clearance
6.3 in (160 mm)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
MEMO
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
performed by an authorized SUZUKI
dealer who will have well-trained techni-
cians and genuine parts.
ommended under Severe Driving Condi-
tions” in this section.
General Information
NOTICE (for U.S.A.)
• Repeated short-distance driving less
than 5 miles (8 km).
• Extensive idling and/or slow-speed driv-
ing in stop-and-go traffic.
• Driving on dusty roads.
• Driving on hilly or mountainous terrain.
• Driving in heavy city traffic where the
outside temperatures regularly reach
90°F (32°C) or higher.
• Driving as a taxi, police or delivery vehi-
cle.
Maintenance, replacement or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automo-
bile repair establishment or individual
using any part which has been certified
under the provisions in the Clean Air
Act sec. 207. (a) (2).
Non-SUZUKI genuine parts and accesso-
ries have not been examined or approved
by SUZUKI. SUZUKI can certify neither the
suitability nor the safety of non-SUZUKI
parts and accessories and is not liable for
damage caused by their use.
Inadequate, incomplete, or insufficient ser-
vicing may result in operational problems
with your vehicle that could even lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal
injury.
This section provides the maintenance
schedule which is necessary to ensure
that your vehicle gives many years of satis-
fying motoring.
• Frequent driving when outside tempera-
ture remains below freezing.
You are responsible for properly operating
dance with the instructions described in
this manual. Failure to do so is likely to
result in the denial of warranty coverage.
Selecting the Right Condition
First you’ll need to decide which of the two
conditions is right for your vehicle. Here’s
how to decide which condition to follow.
You should follow the required mainte-
nance schedule for the condition that best
describes your driving.
It is your responsibility to properly maintain
and operate your vehicle. Be sure that you
follow the periodic required maintenance
schedule and general operation instruc-
tions in this manual.
Normal Condition
The normal condition for driving means
driving under typical, everyday driving con-
ditions. You may follow the ordinary main-
tenance schedule.
It is also your responsibility to keep records
and receipts as proof of regular mainte-
nance. Records and receipts together with
this owner’s manual should be transferred
to any subsequent owner.
Severe Condition
If the vehicle is operated under any of the
following conditions, some of the mainte-
nance schedule items need to be serviced
more frequently. See “Maintenance Rec-
You may have maintenance services per-
formed on your vehicle by any qualified
person or facility. However, it is recom-
mended that the maintenance services be
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance Services
Maintenance services and record retention are the owner’s responsibility. You should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance services chart.
Maintenance Recommended under Normal Driving Conditions
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66
15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
Months
x 1,000 miles 7.5
x 1,000 km
6
72
78
84
90
Maintenance
Item
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Engine Control System
Drive Belt (Alternator, Power steering
Pump & A/C Compressor)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine Oil & Oil Filter
Cooling System Hose & Connections
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
Engine Coolant
Dex-cool
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months, and
replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 60 months.
Fuel Filter (integrated in Fuel Pump)
Fuel Line & Connections
Air Cleaner Element
Spark Plugs
I*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
R*
R*
R*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Spark Plug Wires
Replace every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
EVAP Canister and Vapor Lines
EVAP Canister Vent Valve Filter
PCV System
I*
I*
I*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Timing Belt
R
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174 180
Months
x 1,000 miles 120 127.5 135 142.5 150 157.5 165 172.5 180 187.5 195 202.5 210 217.5 225
x 1,000 km 192 204 216 228 240 252 264 276 288 300 312 324 336 348 360
Maintenance
Item
Engine Control System (continued)
Drive Belt (Alternator, Power steering
Pump & A/C Compressor)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine Oil & Oil Filter
Cooling System Hose & Connections
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
R
R
I
Engine Coolant
Dex-cool
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months, and
replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 60 months.
Fuel Filter (integrated in Fuel Pump)
Fuel Line & Connections
Air Cleaner Element
Spark Plugs
I*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
R*
R*
R*
I*
R*
RI*
I*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Spark Plug Wires
Replace every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
I*
I*
EVAP Canister and Vapor Lines
EVAP Canister Vent Valve Filter
PCV System
I*
R*
I*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Timing Belt
R
R
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66
15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5
Months
x 1,000 miles 7.5
x 1,000 km
6
72
78
84
90
Maintenance
Item
12
R
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Chassis and Body
Air Filter (A/C)
Exhaust Pipe & Mountings
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Front Brake Pads & Discs
Rear Brake Pads & Discs
Parking Brake
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake Line & Connections
(Including Booster)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manual Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chassis and Underbody Bolts and
Nuts Tight/Secure
Tire Condition & Inflation Pressure
Tire Rotation
Steering Wheel & Linkage
Power steering Fluid & Lines
Drive Shaft Boots
Safety Belts, Buckles & Anchorages
Lubricate Locks, Hinges & Hood Latch
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174 180
Months
x 1,000 miles 120 127.5 135 142.5 150 157.5 165 172.5 180 187.5 195 202.5 210 217.5 225
x 1,000 km 192 204 216 228 240 252 264 276 288 300 312 324 336 348 360
Maintenance
Item
Chassis and Body (continued)
Air Filter (A/C)
Exhaust Pipe & Mountings
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Front Brake Pads & Discs
Rear Brake Pads & Discs
Parking Brake
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
I*
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(Including Booster)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manual Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chassis and Underbody Bolts and
Nuts Tight/Secure
Tire Condition & Inflation Pressure
Tire Rotation
Steering Wheel & Linkage
Power steering Fluid & Lines
Drive Shaft Boots
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Safety Belts, Buckles & Anchorages
Lubricate Locks, Hinges & Hood Latch
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions
Follow this schedule if your car is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:
• Repeated short-distance driving less than 5 miles (8 km).
• Extensive idling and/or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.
• Driving on dusty roads.
• Driving in heavy city traffic where the outside temperatures reg-
ularly reach 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• Driving as a taxi, police or delivery vehicle.
• Frequent driving when outside temperature remains below
freezing.
• Driving on hilly or mountainous terrain.
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
x 1,000 miles 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25
Months
3
6
9
36
39
42
45
Maintenance
Item
x 1,000 km
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
Engine Control System
Drive Belt (Alternator, Power steering
Pump & A/C Compressor)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine Oil & Oil Filter
Cooling System Hose & Connections
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
Engine Coolant
Dex-cool
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months, and
replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 60 months.
Fuel Filter (integrated in Fuel Pump)
Fuel Line & Connections
Air Cleaner Element
Spark Plugs
I*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Spark Plug Wires
Replace every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
EVAP Canister and Vapor Lines
EVAP Canister Vent Valve Filter
PCV System
I*
I*
I*
I*
Timing Belt
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 78
x 1,000 miles 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5
x 1,000 km 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174 180
Months
48
81
84
87
90
Maintenance
Item
Engine Control System (continued)
Drive Belt (Alternator, Power steering
Pump & A/C Compressor)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Engine Oil & Oil Filter
Cooling System Hose & Connections
R
I
R
I*
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
I*
R
Engine Coolant
Dex-cool
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months, and
replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 60 months.
Fuel Filter (integrated in Fuel Pump)
Fuel Line & Connections
Air Cleaner Element
Spark Plugs
I*
I*
R*
R*
R*
I*
R*
R*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Spark Plug Wires
Replace every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
EVAP Canister and Vapor Lines
EVAP Canister Vent Valve Filter
PCV System
I*
R*
I*
I*
I*
Timing Belt
R
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33
x 1,000 miles 3.75 7.5 11.25 15 18.75 22.5 26.25 30 33.75 37.5 41.25 45 48.75 52.5 56.25
Months
3
6
9
36
39
42
45
Maintenance
Item
x 1,000 km
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
Chassis and Body
Air Filter (A/C)
Exhaust Pipe & Mountings
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Front Brake Pads & Discs
Rear Brake Pads & Discs
Parking Brake
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake Line & Connections
(Including Booster)
I
I
I
Manual Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chassis and Underbody Bolts and
Nuts Tight/Secure
Tire Condition & Inflation Pressure
Tire Rotation
Steering Wheel & Linkage
Power steering Fluid & Lines
Drive Shaft Boots
Safety Belts, Buckles & Anchorages
Lubricate Locks, Hinges & Hood Latch
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance
Interval
Kilometers (miles) or time in months, whichever comes first
51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 78
x 1,000 miles 60 63.75 67.5 71.25 75 78.75 82.5 86.25 90 93.75 97.5 101.25 105 108.75 112.5
x 1,000 km 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150 156 162 168 174 180
Months
48
81
84
87
90
Maintenance
Item
Chassis and Body (continued)
Air Filter (A/C)
Exhaust Pipe & Mountings
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Front Brake Pads & Discs
Rear Brake Pads & Discs
Parking Brake
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I*
R
I
I
I
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(Including Booster)
Manual Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Chassis and Underbody Bolts and
Nuts Tight/Secure
Tire Condition & Inflation Pressure
Tire Rotation
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Rotate every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Steering Wheel & Linkage
Power steering Fluid & Lines
Drive Shaft Boots
Safety Belts, Buckles & Anchorages
Lubricate Locks, Hinges & Hood Latch
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Record
Chart Symbols
Recommended Fluids and Lubri-
cants
I – Inspect these items and their related
parts. Correct, clean, refill, adjust, lubri-
cate, inflate or replace as required.
After the scheduled services are per-
formed, record the date, odometer reading
and who performed the service and any
additional information from “Owner Checks
and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”
on the following record pages. Also, you
should retain all maintenance receipts.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by
name, part number or specification may be
obtained from your dealer.
R – Replace or Change
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
NOTE:
Check the engine oil and engine coolant
levels weekly.
SAE 5W30 SM grade
or SAE 10W30 SM
grade
Engine Oil
*: SUZUKI recommends that this mainte-
nance service be performed at the time/
mileage interval indicated to ensure the
peak performance and long-term reliability
of your vehicle. However, the U.S. Environ-
mental Protection Agency and the Califor-
nia Air Resources Board have determined
that failure to perform this specific mainte-
nance item will not void your emission war-
ranty or limit recall liability.
Engine Coolant Dex-cool Coolant
Brake/Clutch
DOT-3
Fluid
®
®
Power Steer-
ing Fluid
DEXRON II D or
DEXRON III
Automatic Tran- ESSO LT 71141 or
saxle Fluid
TOTAL ATF H50235
Manual
Transaxle Fluid
SAE 75W90
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Record
Serviced By
Date
Odometer Reading
Maintenance Record
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Record
Serviced By
Date
Odometer Reading
Maintenance Record
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Maintenance Record
Serviced By
Date
Odometer Reading
Maintenance Record
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
GENERAL INFORMATION
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 7-1
Safety Certification Label ................................................... 7-2
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 7-2
Warranties ............................................................................ 7-2
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data
Recorders ............................................................................ 7-3
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 7-4
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
may be found in the location shown in the
above illustrations. This number is used to
register the vehicle. It is also used to assist
your SUZUKI dealer when ordering parts
or referring to special service information.
Engine Serial Number
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number
EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)
60G128
The engine serial number is stamped on
the cylinder block as shown in the above
illustration.
60G152
54G081
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Certification Label
Emission Compliance Label
(for U.S.A.)
Warranties
The warranties covering your vehicle are
explained in a separate New Vehicle War-
ranty Information booklet given to you at
the time of sale. Please read this booklet
carefully so you can understand your rights
and responsibilities.
For U.S.A.
The following warranties are provided with
your vehicle:
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or
Accessories
• Emission Components Defect Warranty
• Emission Performance Warranty
52D059
This label contains important safety-
related information about your vehicle. The
label is located on the driver’s door lock pil-
lar.
60A412
The EPA emission compliance label is
located under the hood. It provides much
of the information needed to perform an
engine tune-up on your vehicle.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
operation of the vehicle. This stored In addition, once SUZUKI collects or
information can assist technicians in receives data, SUZUKI may use the
repairing the vehicle when malfunc- data for research conducted by
tions occur. Other information is stored SUZUKI, make the data available for
only in the event of crash, by computer outside research if need is shown and
systems that are commonly called confidentiality is assured, or make
On-Board Vehicle Computers
and Event Data Recorders
Your vehicle is equipped with on-board
computer systems which monitor and
control several aspects of vehicle per-
formance, including the following:
• Emission-related components and
engine parameters such as engine
speed and throttle position are moni-
tored to provide emissions control
and to provide optimum fuel econ-
omy. Your vehicle also has an on-
board diagnostic system which mon-
itors and records information about
emission-related malfunctions.
Event Data Recorders (EDRs).
summary data which does not identify
specific vehicles available for outside
research.
In a crash event, EDRs such as the
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod-
ule (SDM) in your vehicle may record Others, such as law enforcement per-
information about the condition of the sonnel, may have access to the spe-
vehicle and how it was operated, such cial equipment that can read the
as data related to airbag readiness, information if they have access to the
airbag performance, safety belt usage, vehicle or storage device.
and the severity of the collision. These
data can help provide a better under-
monitored to provide air bag deploy-
ment.
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur and lead to
the designing of safer vehicles. The
• If your vehicle is equipped with
antilock brakes, conditions such as
vehicle speed and brake perfor-
mance are monitored, so that the
ABS system can provide effective
antilock braking. If your vehicle has
an Electronic Stability Program
SDM in your vehicle does not collect
or store personal information.
To read the stored information, special
equipment is needed and access to
the vehicle or storage device is
required. SUZUKI will not access infor-
mation about a crash event or share it
with others other than with the consent
of the vehicle owner or lessee, in
response to an official request from
the police or similar government office,
as part of SUZUKI’s defense of litiga-
tion through the discovery process, or
as required by law.
®
(ESP ) system, conditions such as
yaw rate, lateral acceleration, and
brake fluid pressure are monitored,
®
so that the ESP system can help
the driver control the vehicle in diffi-
cult driving situations.
Some information may be stored by
the on-board computers during normal
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
To contact American Suzuki, owners
in the continental United States can
call toll-free 1-800-934-0934, or write
to:
Reporting Safety Defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should
immediately
inform
the
American Suzuki Motor Corporation
Automotive Customer Relations
3251 East Imperial Highway
Brea, CA 92821-6795
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
SUZUKI dealer, or American Suzuki
Motor Corp.
For owners outside the continental
United States, please refer to the dis-
tributor’s address listed in your War-
ranty Information booklet.
For vehicles registered for use and
principally operated in Canada please
contact Suzuki Canada Inc. at 1-905-
889-2677 extension 2254 or write to:
Suzuki Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
100 East Beaver Creek Road
Richmond Hill, On
L4B 1J6
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Sev-
enth Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL INFORMATION
MEMO
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
INDEX
CD CHANGER OPERATION (Optional) ............................. 3-45
Checking Things Under the Hood ..................................... 5-4
Checking Your Restraint Systems .................................... 1-33
Chemical Paint Spotting ..................................................... 5-47
Child Restraint Systems ..................................................... 1-18
Child Restraints .................................................................. 1-15
City Driving .......................................................................... 4-10
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-44
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ............................... 5-45
Climate Control System ..................................................... 3-12
Climate Controls ................................................................. 3-12
Clock .................................................................................... 3-12
Control of a Vehicle ............................................................ 4-2
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap .................................... 5-14
Cooling System ................................................................... 5-15
Correcting the Tire Pressure ............................................. 5-34
Cruise Control ..................................................................... 3-6
Cruise Control Light ........................................................... 3-25
Cupholder(s) ........................................................................ 2-21
D
A
Add-On Electrical Equipment .............................................5-48
Air Bag Readiness Light .....................................................3-20
Antenna ................................................................................2-23
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..........................................4-3
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ............................3-21
Appearance Care .................................................................5-44
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ..........................................3-11
Audio System .......................................................................3-29
Automatic Transmission Fluid ...........................................5-10
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................................2-12
B
8
8
Backup Lamps and Tail/Stop Lamps .................................5-26
Battery ..................................................................................5-20
Before Driving ......................................................................2-10
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ...........................................4-11
Brake System Warning Light ..............................................3-21
Brakes ...................................................................................5-18
Braking .................................................................................4-3
Bulb Replacement ...............................................................5-23
Buying New Tires ................................................................5-36
C
Daily Inspection Checklist ................................................. 2-10
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light .......................... 3-26
Defensive Driving ................................................................ 4-1
California Fuel ......................................................................5-1
Capacities .............................................................................5-53
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Doing Your Own Service Work ...........................................5-1
Driving at Night ....................................................................4-8
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads .....................................4-9
Drunken Driving ...................................................................4-1
E
Electrical System .................................................................5-48
Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ...........................7-2
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter .....................................................5-9
Engine Compartment Overview .........................................5-6
Engine Coolant ....................................................................5-12
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge .................................3-22
Engine Exhaust ....................................................................2-19
Engine Oil .............................................................................5-7
Engine Serial Number .........................................................7-1
Exterior Lamps ....................................................................3-8
F
Front Seats .......................................................................... 1-1
Front Storage Area ............................................................. 2-22
G
Gasoline Octane .................................................................. 5-1
General Information ............................................................ 6-1
Glossary of Tire Terminology ............................................ 5-30
Glove Box ............................................................................ 2-21
H
Halogen Bulbs ..................................................................... 5-23
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................................... 3-2
Head Restraints ................................................................... 1-3
Headlamp Aiming ................................................................ 5-23
Headlamp Wiring ................................................................. 5-48
Headlamps ........................................................................... 5-24
Highbeam On Light ............................................................. 3-25
Highway Hypnosis .............................................................. 4-12
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................................... 4-12
Hold Mode Light .................................................................. 3-22
Hood Release ...................................................................... 5-4
Horn ...................................................................................... 3-2
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ........................................ 1-32
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................................... 1-7
Hydraulic Clutch ................................................................. 5-12
I
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .......................................5-4
Filling Your Tank .................................................................5-2
Finish Damage .....................................................................5-47
Fog Lamp Light ....................................................................3-25
Folding Rear Seat ................................................................1-4
Freeway Driving ...................................................................4-11
Front Armrest Storage Area ...............................................2-22
Front Fog Lamps .................................................................5-24
Identification Numbers ....................................................... 7-1
If a Tire Goes Flat ................................................................ 5-38
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Ignition Positions ................................................................2-11
Infants and Young Children ................................................1-16
Instrument Panel Cluster ....................................................3-18
J
K
Keys ......................................................................................2-1
L
Lap-Shoulder Belt ................................................................1-11
Leaving Your Vehicle ..........................................................2-6
License Plate Lamps ...........................................................5-26
Liftgate ..................................................................................2-6
Loading Your Vehicle ..........................................................4-17
Lockout Protection ..............................................................2-6
Loss of Control ....................................................................4-7
Low Fuel Warning Light ......................................................3-26
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) ..................................................................1-22
Luggage Compartment Lamp .............................................5-25
M
Manual Seats (With Sliding Storage Tray) ........................ 1-1
Manual Seats (Without Sliding Storage Tray) .................. 1-1
Manual Transmission Fluid ................................................ 5-11
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) ............................................................................... 7-4
New Vehicle Break-In .......................................................... 2-10
O
Off-Road Recovery ............................................................. 4-6
Oil Pressure Light ............................................................... 3-24
Older Children ..................................................................... 1-15
On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data
Recorders ............................................................................ 7-3
Outlet Adjustment ............................................................... 3-17
Outside Convex Mirror ....................................................... 2-21
Outside Heated Mirrors ...................................................... 2-21
Outside Manual Mirror ........................................................ 2-20
Outside Power Mirrors ....................................................... 2-20
P
Parking Brake ...................................................................... 2-16
Parking Over Things That Can Burn ................................. 2-18
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .................. 2-18
Passenger Air Bag Off Indicator ........................................ 3-26
Passenger Compartment Air Filter .................................... 3-17
Passenger Sensing System ............................................... 1-30
Power Door Locks .............................................................. 2-5
Power Steering Fluid .......................................................... 5-17
Power Windows .................................................................. 2-7
Maintenance .........................................................................6-2
Maintenance Recommended under Normal Driving
Conditions ............................................................................6-2
Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving
Conditions ............................................................................6-6
Maintenance Record ...........................................................6-10
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ................................................3-23
Manual Lumbar ....................................................................1-2
Manual Rearview Mirror ......................................................2-20
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts .....................1-7
R
Safety Certification Label ................................................... 7-2
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat
Position ................................................................................ 1-25
Securing a Child Restraint with Top Strap ....................... 1-21
Selecting the Right Condition ............................................ 6-1
Service ................................................................................. 5-1
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 1-33
Sheet Metal Damage ........................................................... 5-47
Shifting Into Park (P) .......................................................... 2-17
Shifting Out of Park (P) ...................................................... 2-17
Spare Tire ............................................................................ 5-43
Specifications ...................................................................... 5-53
Speed Sensitive Power Steering (SSPS) Warning
Radio with Six-Disc CD (Double Display, MP3/WMA)
Rear Seat Armrest ...............................................................2-23
Rear Seat Passengers .........................................................1-11
Rear Seats ............................................................................1-4
Rear Sidemarker Lamps .....................................................5-27
Rear Window and Outside Rearview Mirror Defogger .....3-16
Rear Window Washer/Wiper ...............................................3-6
Reclining Seatbacks ............................................................1-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ..............................6-10
Recreational Vehicle Towing ..............................................4-16
Remote Keyless Entry System ...........................................2-1
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation .........................2-2
Replacement Bulbs .............................................................5-27
Reporting Safety Defects ....................................................7-4
Restraint System Check .....................................................1-33
Right Front Passenger Position .........................................1-11
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked ...................2-19
S
Light ..................................................................................... 3-22
Speedometer and Odometer .............................................. 3-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................................ 2-10
Starting Your Engine .......................................................... 2-11
Steering ................................................................................ 4-5
STEERING WHEEL REMOTE OPERATION ..............3-37, 3-44
Storage Areas ...................................................................... 2-21
Sun Visors ........................................................................... 2-8
Sunglasses Storage Compartment ................................... 2-22
Sunroof ................................................................................ 2-23
Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 1-26
T
Safety Belt: They are for Everyone ....................................1-5
Safety Belt Extender ............................................................1-14
Safety Belt Pretensioner System .......................................1-13
Safety Belt Reminder Light .................................................3-19
Safety Belt Reminder Tone .................................................3-19
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ....................................1-10
Tachometer .......................................................................... 3-19
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
Theft-Deterrent Systems .....................................................2-8
Tire Size ................................................................................5-29
Tires ......................................................................................5-28
Top Strap ..............................................................................1-20
Top Strap Anchor Location ................................................1-21
Towing ..................................................................................4-16
Towing a Trailer ...................................................................4-19
Towing Your Vehicle ...........................................................4-16
Trip Odometer ......................................................................3-18
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................................3-3
U
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ........................................ 1-32
Where Are the Air Bags? .................................................... 1-29
Where to Put the Restraint ................................................. 1-20
Windows .............................................................................. 2-7
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 5-18
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .............................. 5-27
Windshield Wiper Fuses .................................................... 5-48
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever ....................................... 3-4
Winter Driving ..................................................................... 4-13
Y
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ........................ 4-1
Underbody Maintenance .....................................................5-47
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .............................................5-37
V
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...................................5-47
Vehicle Identification ...........................................................5-48
Vehicle Identification Number ............................................7-1
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................................5-48
Vehicle Loading ...................................................................5-35
W
Warning Lights, Gauges and Indicators ............................3-18
Warranties ............................................................................7-2
Weatherstrips .......................................................................5-45
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
MEMO
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE STATION INFORMATION
Fuel recommendation:
Brake and clutch fluid:
See page 5-1
DOT3
Engine oil recommendation:
Automatic transmission fluid:
Engine oil with “Starburst” symbol
ESSO LT71141 or TOTAL ATF H50235
For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the
Tire cold pressure:
“SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE” section.
See the “Tire Information Label” located on the driver’s
door lock pillar.
Made from 100% recycled paper,
except for cover.
Printed in U.S.A.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|